JP6500437B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, with displacement means by being lift is raised to its lifting means with increasing elevation means, the displacement means with the descending of the elevating means gaming machine is lowered is known by its own weight ing. (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-233494, A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the attitude of the displacement means at the lowered position is unstable.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the attitude of the displacement means at the lowered position.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a proposal in section, a displacement means are Displacement possible between guided first position and the second position in the vertical direction on the guide means, support means for supporting the displacement means to the second position, and a lifting means which is formed to be descending temperature in the vertical direction, the displacement means has raised is that its lifting means with increasing the lifting means Is raised from the second position to the first position , and the displacement means is lowered from the first position to the second position by its own weight as the elevating means is lowered, and the displacement means is the second position. It is provided with a rise restricting means which restricts the upward displacement of the displacement means when it is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a top raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a top raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a top raising and lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, (d) is a second gear It is a rear view of. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission apparatus. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of a connecting member, (b) is a front view of the connecting member in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 26 (a) It is a rear view of the connection member in XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd channel | path formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevator unit as viewed in the direction of arrows XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left rocking unit. It is a front perspective view of a left rocking unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left rocking unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rocking unit. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking operation unit. It is a front view of a rocking operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid-crystal raising / lowering unit and a left rocking unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid-crystal raising / lowering unit and a left rocking unit. It is a front view of rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of rotation unit. It is a front view of rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a rotation member, a part of throwing device, and a guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation member, (b) is a sectional view of the one side rotation member and the other side rotation member along the line LIb-LIb in FIG. is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected in the plane containing the rotating shaft of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of a rotation member, (b) is a side view of the rotation member in the arrow LIVb direction view of Fig.54 (a). It is a rear view of the rotation member in the arrow LV direction view of FIG.54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a division member. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned to 1st area. (A) And (b) is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned to 2nd area. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a throwing apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a throwing apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the throwing apparatus in the state by which the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arrange | positioned in a holding position. It is a front view of the throwing apparatus in the state by which the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism is arrange | positioned in the separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece protrusion-retraction mechanism in the state by which the holding piece was arrange | positioned in the protrusion position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the holding piece protrusion-retraction mechanism in the state by which the holding piece was arrange | positioned in the retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of a holding piece retraction mechanism in the state where the holding piece is disposed at the projecting position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the retention piece protrusion mechanism at line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a holding piece retraction mechanism in the state where the holding piece is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the retention piece protrusion mechanism at the line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a) FIG. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotation member. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the first section, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation drive member is rotated by 30 degrees. It is a state relation figure showing the relation between the state of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member to a division member, and the phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the partial enlarged side view which expanded the part in 1st area of a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rocking | swiveling unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79 (b) It is a sectional view of the body member of a tip wall member, and (d) is a front view of the body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of a left rocking unit. It is a front view of a left rocking unit. It is a front view of a left rocking unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of a left rocking unit and a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising and lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising and lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in a 4th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of FIG. 89 (a), (c) FIG. 7 is a partial front view of a drive-side slide member.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface on the left side thereof. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (projected state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (shrinkage State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” is easily displayed, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 82a is disposed on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specified winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduction state), and the ball can not win into the second specified winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), a special gaming state in which the ball easily wins the second specified winning opening 82 Can.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  6 and 7, the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position is the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swing unit 500 in FIG. In FIG. 10, the state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 600 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated in a state in which it is connected with 520. Further, FIGS. 6 to 10 illustrate the state in which the upper lifting unit 300 is disposed at the raised position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 is provided with a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 210, an upper lifting unit 300, a liquid crystal lifting unit 400, and a left swing unit 500, a rotation unit 600 and a light emitting decoration member 700 are accommodated respectively.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 to the front, It forms in the box shape which one side open | released. In the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, a recess having a substantially circular shape is recessed at the center, and the rotation unit 600 is accommodated in the recess. The liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper lifting unit 300, the left swing unit 500 and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge, the left edge and the lower edge of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. It is arranged in each department.

  The upper elevating unit 300 includes elevating bodies 330 in which a plurality (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in parallel in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 8). It is formed to be vertically movable (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, when the lifting body 330 is disposed at the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8). When 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed in a vertical posture in which the axis is vertically aligned, and a pair of guide rods 451 disposed at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and both ends of the guide rods 451 in the width direction A drive-side slide member 420 and a driven-side slide member 430 which are slidably displaceably supported, and a drive motor 441 for driving the drive-side slide member 420 up and down. Thus, the driven slide member 430 is driven up and down.

  That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered. In accordance with the lowering of the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  A second passage forming member 422 is disposed in the drive-side slide member 420, and the display device 81 in FIG. 3 is disposed in the driven-side slide member 430. When the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connecting position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 9). Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the upper lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swinging unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 which is swung in the direction of moving the distal end side up and down around the proximal end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip end, it is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the tip end is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, When the tip end side is swung in a swinging direction, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is released.

  The ball flowing down the game area is allowed to flow into the left rocking unit 500, and the left rocking unit 500 is flowed in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged in the connection position (see FIG. 9). In the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position while the second ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520 (see FIG. 10) The ball which has flowed in is sent to the game area through a passage which will be described later, which is provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

  The rotation unit 600 is a rendering device configured to simulate a roulette. That is, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disc) formed rotatably and the wheel is divided in the circumferential direction and colored red or black and different numbers are displayed respectively And a portion corresponding to the pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647), and the ball B thrown from the device (pitching device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel corresponds to a plurality of pockets. It is formed to fall into either.

  When the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotation unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 so as not to be visible from the player. When placed (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and when the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 10), In addition to the part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from the ball B to be thrown to the portion corresponding to the pocket Exposed, these are made visible to the player.

  The light emitting decorative member 700 includes a case body formed of a light transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs disposed inside the case body, and an aspect of light emitted from the LED (for example, the light emitting LED By changing the number and the light emission time, effects by light emission are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper lifting unit 300, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emitting decoration member 700 will be described. First, the upper lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper lifting unit 300. As shown in FIG. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the elevators 330 arranged in parallel in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the rising position, and in FIG. The state of being placed in the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper lifting unit 300, a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of lifting bodies 330 are disposed in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each lifting body 330 is It is configured to be movable up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevator 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300. As shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper lifting unit 300 includes a base member 310 in the form of a horizontally long rectangular plate and a space for housing the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, and an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is disposed on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force necessary for the elevation operation of the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330 Prepare.

  The cover member 310 has a semicircular shape in which the center of the circle is disposed at the lower end, and a semicircular recessed portion 311 recessed from the front side to the back, and the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side. And a guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 is formed with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rendering portion 331 of the elevating body 320, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the rendering portion 331 are vertically linear Is placed at the matching position. Thereby, when the effect part 331 moves upward, it becomes possible to move to the front of the position interfering with the semicircular recessed part 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the upper and lower width of the base member 310 is secured. The rising movement width of the effect part 331 can also be secured large.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-like portion extending in the vertical direction, and is protruded to a position where it can contact the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the lifting and lowering body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the elevating body 330 moves in the lateral direction (parallel movement or tilting operation) while moving up and down.

  In addition, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion recessed from the front side to the back side, the area in which the back side can be made invisible can be expanded compared to the case where the space penetrates in the front and rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging the mechanism portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor which is not intended to make the player visually recognize).

  The rear cover 320 has a main body 321 formed in the shape of a case whose front side and lower side are open, a columnar support portion 322 projecting from the main body 321 to the front side, and a front surface from the support portion 322 A guide hole 323 which is a long hole drilled with the extending direction aligned with the vertical direction at a position displaced in the left-right direction and a bottom portion around which the upper pivot portion 322 is convexly supported And a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape provided along the radial direction of 322.

  The shaft support portion 322 is a portion for supporting the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole for guiding the lifting and lowering operation of the lifting and lowering body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the rising position or the lowering position, respectively. The end of the locking arc 351 c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be abutted in the rotational direction.

  The lifting body 330 has a rendering portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the rendering portion 331 and extending in the vertical direction at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the rendering portion 331 And.

  The effect portion 331 is a portion in which a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and effects are displayed by displaying a pattern or a figure on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 is provided with a slide shaft 332 a which is provided so as to protrude on the back side and to a position where it is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

  The slide shaft 332 a is not in a form in which a plurality of slide shafts are provided in a convex shape, but in a form in which one is provided in a convex state. Therefore, since the number of the guide holes 323 can be reduced to one, the movement distance of the rack 332 can be secured large while suppressing the space for the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can be brought into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 is in the left-right direction even if there is one connection position with the guide hole 323 of the rack 332. Can be prevented from Thus, the effect part 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 is changed to prevent deterioration of the meshing relationship. be able to.

  The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 which is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 which is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits the drive force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is engaged with the first gear 351 that is supported by the support portion 322 and engaged with the drive gear 342, and engaged with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the support portion 322. And a second gear 352.

  As described above, since the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevators 330 are provided with the independent drive motors 341, in addition to the operation in which all the elevators 330 interlock with each other, the elevators 330 can be It can be moved up and down individually. In addition, since the technical idea of each raising / lowering body 330 is common, below, the raising / lowering body 330 arrange | positioned by the left end of FIG. 11 is demonstrated, and the description about the other raising / lowering body 330 is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16 (d) is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a having gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface. And an overhanging length of about half the length of the gear teeth (a pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth is extended to a portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 351a Abutment portions 351b radially extended in an overhanging length), and locking provided in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis from the back side surface of the main body portion 351a And an arc portion 351c.

  The contact portion 351b has an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main portion 351a in the radial direction, and the tooth thickness of two to three gear teeth formed in the main portion 351a (arc An angle of the center of is composed of a tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main portion 351a is longer than the thickness of one gear tooth, strength in the circumferential direction can be secured compared to the gear teeth of the main portion 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion where the circumferential tip can contact the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (c) and 16 (d), the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and the intermediate plate 353 is formed in a donut shape. And an irregular gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth shape, and a spur gear shape on the rear side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with the rack 332 (see FIG. 15) And a transmission gear portion 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed to project radially outward of the tips of the gear teeth of the differential gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, contact is possible by overlapping with the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) to be meshed in a direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17). It is possible to suppress movement in a direction parallel to the tooth surface at the time of raising and lowering operation of 330.

  The irregular gear portion 354 is a portion engaged with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and has a through hole through which the pivot portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted. A main body portion 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b overhangingly formed on a portion where formation of gear teeth is omitted on an outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (FIG. 16C right side And an adjacent gear tooth 354c provided adjacent to the end portion).

  The receiving portion 354b is a front view counterclockwise side from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (a side where the first gear 351 bites into the adjacent gear portion 354c when moving the elevating body 330 upward) A portion formed by an arrangement angle (about 30 degrees to 50 degrees) for two gear teeth, and in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322 Tooth length of the adjacent gear tooth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 curved along the arc shape of the radius r formed by and the circumferential wall surface of the curved wall portion 354b1 and the adjacent gear tooth 354c And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with about half the height of the teeth (the length of the teeth extending to the pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Therefore, the side face on the connection wall portion 354b2 side of the adjacent gear tooth 354c has an extension length of about half the radial extension length of the side face on the opposite side of the connection wall portion 354b2 of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, The connection wall portion 354b2 is formed integrally with the connection wall portion 354b2 so as to radially project from the connection wall portion 354b2.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state in which the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the pivot portion 322, the second gear 352 curves along an arc having a radius r formed by the tip end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is disposed, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are disposed outside the arc having the radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c have the radius r). Stay in formation at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the raising and lowering operation of the raising and lowering body 330 will be described. In addition, since the operation | movement path | route of raise operation and fall operation is common, here, raise operation is demonstrated and description of fall operation is abbreviate | omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the lifting and lowering body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the lifting operation of the lifting and lowering body 330 is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 17, the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position, and in FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which the distance raising operation is performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 starts meshing with the adjacent gear teeth 354c of the second gear 352 is illustrated, and in FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the end face of the contact portion 351b in the circumferential direction is not in contact with the adjacent gear teeth 354c. In the state shown in FIG. 20, only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) to the rack 332 through the driving gear 342 and the transmission device 350. Ru. More specifically, the drive force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351, The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack engaged with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, whereby the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, the rack 332 can be mechanically prevented from moving further downward.

  Further, in the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential gear end portion of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 abuts on the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320 so that the first gear 351 is engaged. In the front view clockwise direction (direction in which the rack 332 is moved downward) is mechanically prevented.

  Thereby, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to a poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 from the state illustrated in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the rack 332 can be prevented from moving downward, so that the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15 can be pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) to prevent the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being broken.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18, in the process of raising and lowering the raising and lowering body 330, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b whose circumferential thickness is larger than that of the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354c. Therefore, the load (load due to the weight of the elevator 330) transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 can be received by the contact portion 351b, which has a greater strength compared to other gear teeth. The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  The contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is extended to the pitch circle C1, and the connection wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 is extended to the pitch circle C2. Therefore, in the state of FIG. It comes close to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b can be brought into contact with the adjacent gear teeth 354c at a portion close to the root of the adjacent gear teeth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear teeth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to one side surface in the circumferential direction to the connecting wall portion 354b2, strength against a load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial extension length of the side surface on the connection wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, resistance to deformation in the direction perpendicular to the length direction of the adjacent gear teeth 354c increases, and the connection wall portion By integrally forming the 354b2 with the adjacent gear teeth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving a force applied to the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. , Resistance to deformation in the circumferential direction of the adjacent gear teeth 354c is increased. Thus, damage to the adjacent gear teeth 354c when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is received can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the state immediately after the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the arc-shaped tip portion of the abutting portion 351b abuts on the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. Ru.

  Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the lift 330 engaged with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the lift 330 moves in the falling direction, so the second gear 352 moves the rack 332. It rotates in the direction of lowering movement (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the contact portion 351b is disposed in the range in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c rotate (inside of the circle formed by the tips of the adjacent gear teeth 354c). When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c by the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centering on the central axis of the main portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the shaft side of the first gear 351 It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not a direction in which the first gear 351 can be rotated, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is secured (in a structure in which the first gear 351 does not expand and contract in the radial direction) It is difficult to push 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

  The circumferential component Fb is directed in the rotational direction of the first gear 351, but the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b contact each other at a point, so the component Fb slides between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. As the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate, it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Therefore, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating because the adjacent gear tooth 354c is prevented from pushing the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. The state of the elevator 330 is maintained.

  The abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape having a radius r centered on the first gear 351, and as illustrated in FIG. Since the surfaces are abutted along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. As a result, even if the stopping of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the raised position, the first gear 351 can be prevented from over-rotation, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. It is possible to prevent the delay of the vehicle from affecting the operation mode of the elevator 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates to a state where the locking arc portion 351c abuts on the upper locking portion 324, and stops. 18 to 20, the second gear 352 is rotated by pushing the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 by pushing the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, so that the adjacent gear tooth is formed. The state in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth top surface of the contact portion 351b in the state illustrated in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

  From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, since the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction of moving the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). Be done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate with it. Therefore, the state in which the tooth top surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be reliably formed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20, in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, the curved wall portion 354b1 follows the arc shape of the radius r which the second gear 352 forms the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are disposed on the outer side of the arc having the radius r (the second gear 352 side), only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotational direction (from the state illustrated in FIG. 19). 19 can be rotated counterclockwise).

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker (approximately 2 to 3 gear teeth thick) than the other gear teeth, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is made gentle. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the intermediate phase in the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact position of the contact portion 351b is the same. The rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  Further, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is made gentle. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts on the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b, so that the load direction is described in detail. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, since movement of the rack 332 in both the upper and lower directions is restricted in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position, generation of rattling of the elevating body 330 can be suppressed. It is difficult for the conventional crank mechanism to perform restriction in the upper and lower directions (in particular, restriction in the upward direction), and is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in this embodiment. It is a thing.

  Thus, the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the second gear 352 from rotating in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the raised position. It is unnecessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a size larger than its own weight in order to maintain the lifting position in the raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, although it is possible to maintain the lifting body 330 in the raised position by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism is enlarged corresponding to the movement distance of the lifting body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is unnecessary, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be miniaturized.

  A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a separate member that interferes with the contact portion 351b in the rotational direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction is not provided. Therefore, the rotation operation in the direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 20) in which the elevating body 330 of the first gear 351 is moved downward is permitted.

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and is further rotated in the same direction, the restriction on the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351 b The tip end surface is separated from the adjacent gear teeth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can be made another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 has a drive side slide member 420 having an effect part 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moving up and down, and a member moving up following the drive side slide member 420. A driven side slide member 430 having the third symbol display device 81, wherein the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 communicate with the common guide rod 451 and operate in the same direction Be done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 includes a base member 410 configured by a pair of long plate-like members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be vertically movable up and down, and drive thereof A driven side slide member 430 disposed above the side slide member 420 and configured to be vertically movable, a drive device 440 that generates a drive force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and the drive device 440 Transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the driving force to the drive side slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower end portions of the pair of base members 410 And the lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive-side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 is a main body member 411 configured as a long long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion disposed at the upper and lower end portions of the main body member 411 at positions mutually corresponding in the vertical direction A guide rod support portion 412 configured, and an engagement member disposed on the inner side (side approaching the other base member 410) than the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extended on the front side of the main body member 411 A first axially supporting portion 414 convexly formed in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 with the stop portion 413 and the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412, and its first A downward regulating member 415 pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 414 and restricting the downward movement of the drive-side slide member 420, and a cylindrical protrusion disposed on the front side of the main body member 411 disposed below the first pivotal support portion 414 A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion vertically and downwardly in contact with the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430, and the driven side slide member 430 is further moved downward from the contact state. Regulate.

  The lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 rotate as the driving slide member 420 moves up and down to restrict movement of the driven slide member 430. The details will be described later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 at both left and right ends, and is moved up and down by the sliding operation of the rack 452.

  The driven slide member 430 does not have an independent drive device, and is slidably supported by the guide rods 451 at both left and right ends, and is driven to move up and down according to the elevating operation of the drive slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 has a third symbol display device 81, a main body member 431 which is elongated in the left-right direction, functional portions 432 arranged on both ends in the left-right direction of the main body member 431, and its functional portions A guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction at 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-like portion 434 which is extended to be inclined upward and outward at the lower end of the functional portion 432; A fall prevention portion 435 is provided mainly on the back side on the inner side of the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433).

  The hook portion 434 is a portion hooked on the elevation restricting member 417. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 is disposed at the lowered position, the rising restricting member 417 is engaged with and engaged with the engagement surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-like portion 434 (see FIG. 29). The member 430 can be prevented from operating in the upward direction (for example, it can be prevented from rebounding from falling). Further, since the hooked portion 434 is inclined upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the elevation restricting member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hooked portion 434 and the elevation restricting member 417 causes Wobble can also be suppressed.

  The shape of the end of the hook-like portion 434 (outside of the end of the engaging claw 417e (the portion on the right in FIG. 29 in the state shown in FIG. 29)) is the movement locus of the engaging claw 417e. The shape is also fit downward. Therefore, the rotation restricting member 417 can be rotated even in a state in which the engagement claws 417e and the hooks 434 engage with each other and apply a load to each other.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410 and a drive side slide member 420 supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidably movable. A rack 452 meshed with the inner side (the inner side of the pair of drive gears 442) and a longitudinally long plate-like abutting wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth base of the rack 452 to the front side are mainly included.

  The abutment wall 453 has a role of rotating the elevation restricting member 417 to the release side and a role of urging the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 under the urging force of the elevation restricting member 417, the details will be described later. Do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent so that the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the central portion is offset by a predetermined amount on the back side compared to the left and right end portions. The main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 drilled in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner inclined upward as approaching the outer side), and extending above the main body member 461 And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end portion is opened on the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole in which the slide shaft 423 b of the wire housing member 423 is slidably guided.

  The cylindrical passage portion 463 is a cylindrical member through which a ball can pass, and in the state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is formed. It is a member through which the ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

  The detailed configuration of the drive-side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded back perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

  As illustrated in FIG. 23 to FIG. 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disc having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and a rendering portion 422 a configured from circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 in which a portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side and a groove through which a ball can pass is extended from the disk portion to the left in front view; A wire housing member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end in a front view of the forming member 422 and whose other end is supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460; And a connecting member 424 which functions as a portion which has a passage portion which is axially supported and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft and which serves as a portion for introducing a ball into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

  The main body member 421 opens on the front side to a guide portion 421a constituting a part of a cylindrical portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion extending from the central portion to the left in front view Mainly provided with a groove 421b disposed to be inclined downward to the left in a mode, and a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with a size equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball at the lower left end of the groove 421b. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion opened in the back side and extending in the vertical direction and having a circular arc shape in cross section, and the open portion is closed by the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 (see FIG. 22). A cylindrical portion into which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is formed.

  The groove 421 b is a member that forms a ball passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422, and the ball flowing down along the groove 421 b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421 c. Ru.

  The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, and an axially supporting portion 422b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side. A sensor member 422c disposed below the pivotal support portion 422b for detecting passage of a ball, and a groove open to the back side with a width allowing the ball passing through the sensor member 422c to flow downward, in the front and back direction with the groove portion 421b A shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the groove portion 422d having the same shape, the guide portion 422e constituting the cylindrical portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing recess 422f that is recessed at the bottom.

  The pivot portion 422 b is a portion on which the connection member 424 is pivotally supported. In a state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, after the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes the sensor member 422c via the connection member 424, the ball passes the passage formed by the groove portions 422d and 421b. Do.

  The wire storage member 423 is a member for storing a wire which is extended from the lower front member 460 or the like and connected to the effect portion 422a or the like, and has a length pivotally supported by the lower left end portion of the second passage forming member 422 in front view A main body portion 423a which is a rod-like portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b which is provided on the back side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 423a.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that accommodates the wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is formed in a curved shape in a manner to be convex in the direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction Ru. As a result, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape near the pivotally supported position with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and broken.

  The slide shaft 423 b is a rod-like portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.26 (a) is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG.26 (b) is a front view of the connection member 424 in the arrow XXVIb direction view of Fig.26 (a), and FIG.26 (c) is a front view. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIc in FIG. 26 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a which is axially supported by the shaft support portion 422b, and the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 424b to be provided, and a curved plate-shaped lower side wall portion 424c disposed opposite to the upper side wall portion 424b with a length equal to or greater than the diameter of the ball below the upper side wall portion 424b in a front view And a connection cover 424d which connects the rear side ends of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c and is covered between the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c, and is wound around the cylindrical portion 424a A torsion spring 424e is mainly provided to apply a downward force (counterclockwise in FIG. 25) to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a toward the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-like part.

  The lower side wall portion 424c is a plate-like portion curved along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and a space having a length allowing passage of a sphere is made between the lower side wall portion 424c and the upper side wall portion 424b. It is arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that prevents the ball passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the back side. The open portion of the connection member 424 configured on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom of the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 being in contact with the front side. Thereby, the ball can be prevented from spilling from the open portion of the connection member 424.

  The operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. FIG. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downward inclined state in which the open portion formed by the upper side wall 424 b and the lower side wall 424 c of the connection member 424 faces in the left-right direction, and in FIG. The open portion configured by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 is illustrated in an upward inclined state in which the obliquely upward direction is shown, FIG. 27 corresponds to the separated state described later (see FIG. 41), This corresponds to the communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable about the pivot portion 422 b in a state of being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422 f of the second passage formation member 422, and the connection member 424 is of the second passage formation member 422. The front end faces of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c are in contact with the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

  The housing concave portion 422f is formed in an arc shape centered on the pivot portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower side wall portion 424c at a portion opposed to the lower side wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 in the state illustrated in FIG. Curved wall 422f1 and the surface facing the curved wall 422f1 are smoothly connected with the upper side wall 424b of the connecting member 424 in a dented upward inclined state (see FIG. 42) in a direction away from the curved wall 422f1. And an opposing wall 422 f 2 having a curved surface.

  The curved wall portion 422f1 is in radial contact with the lower side wall portion 424c in the downward inclined state of the connection member 424, so that the positional deviation of the connection member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the pivotally supporting portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a large gap, for example, a state having a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm in size), the connecting member When the lower side 424 is inclined downward, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower side wall 424 c and the curved wall 422 f 1.

  On the other hand, in the case where the fitting between the bearing portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the bearing portion is reduced, so connection is not made unless loads from other members occur. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection member 424 from being maintained in the upward inclined state even when no load is generated from other members.

  The opposing wall 422 f 2 is a portion for guiding a ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422 c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by curving the surface disposed facing the curved wall portion 422f1.

  The upper inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left rocking unit 500 and the connection member 424 are in communication. In this state, since the lower side wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball rolling and passing through the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the ball of the sensor member 422c It passes through the opening and flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in the separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 are separated. In this state, the lower side wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower side wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f disposed opposite to the lower end portion (sensor member 422c By setting the dimension between and the wall surface extending vertically upward to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connection member 424 (the sphere is ejected from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even if the ball reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the ball can be stagnated by the connecting member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the raising and lowering operations of the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship between the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. In FIGS. 29 and 30, a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are disposed at the lowered position is illustrated, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Transmission member 450 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the abutting wall 453 and the release projection 417c of the upward regulating member 417 abut. The outline of 452 is illustrated in phantom.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven-side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 abuts on the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from the lower side, and the hooked portion 434 rises. The restricting member 417 is abutted from the upper side. As described above, since the driven slide member 430 is configured to be restricted in movement from both the upper and lower directions, rattling of the driven slide member 430 in the vertical direction at the lowered position can be suppressed.

  Further, since the elevation restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed on both sides of the guide rod 451 inserted into the guide hole 433 and they can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven slide member 430 It is possible to suppress rattling of the portion 432 in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (horizontal direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if the driven slide member 430 is disturbed, such as when it is placed at the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the rendering effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the positions of the elevation restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 in the vertical direction are shifted, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, a direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the elevation restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the driven slide member 430 is disturbed, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player at the moment of being placed at the lowered position, the driven slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the rendering effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the elevation restricting member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the drive-side slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is on the drive-side slide. It is possible to make it difficult to hinder the lifting and lowering operation of the member 420. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the descent restricting member 415 is disposed in front of the elevation restricting member 417, and the height at which the abutment wall 453 of the transmission device 450 is formed (the overhang length of the rack 452 from near the tooth base) Since the height of the lower limit member 415 reaches the height before reaching the lower limit member 415, the lower limit member 415 and the abutment wall 453 do not abut each other in the rotational direction of the lower limit member 415. In addition, since the hooked portion 434 is disposed at the same position as the rising restricting member 417 in the front-rear direction, the hooked portion 434 and the falling restricting member 415 do not contact in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a protruding from the upper end of the contact wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the descent regulating member 415 in the rotational direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. In FIG. 31, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved upward from the lowered position to be disposed at the connection position, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 31, the descent restricting member 415 and the elevating restricting member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged.

  In the state where the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position, a ball can be introduced to the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the elevation restricting member 417 is a member that covers the brim-like portion 434 from the upper side in a state before the upper end of the abutment wall 453 is abutted against the elevation restricting member 417. Rotational operation is enabled between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. The release state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31 but means a state in which the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated from the vertical upper side of the hook-like portion 434 to an attitude in which the elevation restricting member 417 is retracted.

  The elevation restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second support portion 416, an extending plate 417b linearly extended in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and one of the extending plates 417b. A release projection 417c vertically projecting from an end (lower end), an engagement projection 417d vertically projecting from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement projection An engagement portion extending in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-like portion 434 in an engaged state at a convex end of 417 d and disposed above the tip end of the hook-like portion 434 (upper left in FIG. 29) Joint claw portion 417e, a separation slope portion 417f which is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the convex end portion of the engagement convex portion 417d, and one end portion is wound around the cylindrical portion 417a on the main body member 411 of the base member 410 How to roll up elevation control member 417 by being locked Mainly it includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extending plate 417b extends upward from the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Thus, when the release projection 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in the direction away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  The engagement claw portion 417 e engages with the hook-like portion 434 even when the driven slide member 430 moves upward in the engaged state (the engagement claw portion between the hook-like portion 434 and the functional portion 432 The movement of the driven slide member 430 is strongly suppressed by the entry of 417 e).

  The release operation of the elevation restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the abutting wall 453 abuts on the release convex portion 417c, while the rise restricting member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is moved up to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the abutment wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c to raise the up-regulation member 417 outward (clockwise in FIG. 31). , And the engagement projection 417d is retracted from above the hooked portion 434 (released state).

  That is, the release operation of the elevation restricting member 417 can be performed only by the elevation operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) is also used as a drive device for performing the release operation of the elevation restricting member 417 as compared with the case where the solenoid member for performing the release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 is separately provided. The number of drive devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). Moreover, it can suppress that the raise control member 417 is operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the elevation restricting member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the elevation restricting member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), The operation timings of the rack 452 and the elevation restricting member 417 do not match, and it is possible to suppress an operation failure, and when the driven slide member 430 ascends, the elevation restricting member 417 reliably shifts to the release state It can be done. For example, it is possible to suppress that the rack 452 is moved upward while the elevation restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, and an excessive load is applied to the hooked portion 434 and the engagement convex portion 417d of the elevation restricting member 417.

  Further, the rack 452 is moved upward, and the rising restricting member 417 is shifted to the release state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven slide member 430 are abutted. In the state where the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are separated from each other, the driven side slide member 430 is configured as shown in FIG. When the member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, the release state (see FIG. 31) can be configured, and the drive force required to raise the driven-side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, when the drive-side slide member 420 pushes up the driven-side slide member 430 during the upward movement of the drive-side slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven-side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released. Can also be performed by pushing up the driven slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to set the engagement state to a degree that can be released by the pushing up force of the driven slide member 430, making firm engagement difficult. It becomes. Further, in this case, there is a problem that the reaction caused by the reaction between the driven slide member 430 and the engagement portion is vibrated and the posture becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engagement is released by rotating the elevation restricting member 417 and retracting the elevation restricting member 417 from above the collar portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven slide member 430 can be different from the force that causes the elevation restricting member 417 to rotate. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force for suppressing the upward movement of the driven slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for the release.

  In addition, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 do not abut each other when performing the release operation of the elevation restricting member 417, the reaction on the driven-side slide member 430 is less likely to occur. Can stabilize the posture of

  In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421 c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated. Thereby, it becomes possible to discharge the ball which has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 into the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. FIG. In FIG. 32, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31, and the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is in contact with the descent regulating member 415. The drive side slide member 420 is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the state in which the convex plate 453a is disposed at the raised position where it rides on the upper side of the descent restriction member 415 is shown. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the descent regulating member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417 c of the elevation regulating member 417 is in contact with the abutment wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c abuts on the abutting wall 453 is also symmetrical in the left-right direction. Therefore, the release projection 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the lateral direction during the raising and lowering operation.

  The rise restricting member 417 is urged in the leftward and rightward direction of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, so the load of the liquid crystal lift unit 400 in the leftward and rightward directions from the release projection 417c to the abutting wall 453 is It is put on. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is biased in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the attitude of the drive-side slide member 420 in the elevating operation can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release projection 417c to the abutment wall 453 returns the drive-side slide member 420 to the central position. The elevation restricting member 417 is left-right asymmetric.

  That is, on the side where the abutting wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rising regulating member 417 is further rotated to the releasing side, the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and the biasing force is increased. While the force pushing back the contact wall 453 is increased, the rising restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the releasing side on the side where the abutting wall 453 moves in the direction away from the releasing convex portion 417c, so that the torsion spring 417g The amount of deformation is reduced, the biasing force is reduced, and the force for pushing the abutment wall 453 is reduced. Thereby, when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down, rattling in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the elevation restricting member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the biasing force of the torsion spring 417g acts in the direction of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442, so the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 come close to each other in the lateral direction, and the drive resistance can be suppressed from rising (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left and right direction and the rack 452 moves in the direction toward the drive gear 442, the elevation restricting member 417 is externally wound (the engagement convex portion 417 d is the left and right outside of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 Rotation in the direction of rotation) increases the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g and increases the biasing force, thereby increasing the biasing force for pushing back the drive-side slide member 420 while driving the rack 452 When moving away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452 so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 more than the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Are regulated. As a result, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 becomes narrow, so that excessive meshing resistance can be suppressed, and the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 becomes wide, and tooth misalignment occurs. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are disposed at the raised position, the lower surface of the convex plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 is the release convex portion 415 c of the descent regulating member 415. Contact with the upper side (locked).

  The convex plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 in a mode in which the lower side is inclined upward and outward as it goes to the left and right outside.

  The downward inclined member 415 has a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extending plate 415b linearly extended in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extending plates 415b. A release convex portion 415c which is vertically protruded from an end (upper end) and whose tip is formed in a semicircular shape, and one end is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410 by being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. A torsion spring 415d is mainly provided which biases the lowering regulating member 415 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

  As illustrated in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering control member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

  Further, the rotating operation of the lowering regulating member 415 to the locked state illustrated in FIG. 33 is performed by the rack 452 being lifted and the convex plate 453a crossing over the release convex portion 415c of the lowering regulating member 415. Therefore, the driving force for moving the rack 452 upward and the driving force for forming the locking state of the lowering control member 415 can both be generated by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can be shared, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Referring back to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the lowering control member 415, the rising control member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the descent restricting member 415 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) compared to the elevating restricting member 417, and the abutting wall 453 can abut on the elevating restricting member 417 in the vertical direction of FIG. The rear side surface of the lowering restricting member 415 can be brought into surface contact with the front side surface of the abutment wall 453.

  Referring back to FIG. The lowering regulating member 415 and the abutting wall 453 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutting wall 453 and the elevation restricting member 417 abut in the left and right direction (FIG. 33 left and right direction), and the abutting wall 453 and the lowering restricting member 415 extend in the front and rear direction (FIG. Vertically). As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the left-right direction by the elevation restricting member 417, and at the same time in the front-rear direction (a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442) by the downward restricting member 415. It is possible to suppress the clinging.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the area of the toothed surface by relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to make the rack 452 fall forward in the state of being placed in the raised position. Can be prevented.

  From the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is lowered by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction to lower the rack 452, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, whereby the descent restriction member 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). As a result, the locking by the lowering regulating member 415 is released, and the driving slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, since the locking by the lowering regulating member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (it can be used as the driving source), the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the locking of the lowering restricting member 415 is released by the lowering operation of the drive side slide member 420, the operation timing is shifted and the lowering is restricted, as in the case of rotating the lowering restricting member 415 by another driving source. The drive-side slide member 420 is lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, and an overload can be prevented from occurring in the drive source and the lowering control member 415.

  As in the present embodiment, in the structure in which both the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position at the raised position, the locking at the raised position of each member is performed on the driven-side slide member 430. In this case, the structure for connecting and disconnecting the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 is complicated and the cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven slide member 420 is maintained at the raised position by locking the driven slide member 420, the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are maintained at the raised position. In order to reduce the required configuration (only the drive unit 450 and the drive side slide member 420 can be used). Further, by making the interlocking between the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 exclusively by the action of gravity, the structure between the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 can be simplified. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 is lowered on the rack 452, but for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. And the lowering speed of the driven slide member 430 may be smaller than the lowering speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the follower-side slide member 430 abuts on the elevation restricting member 417, the hook shaped portion 434 can act on the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restricting member 417 to rotate the elevation restricting member 417. As a result of the own weight of the driven slide member 430, the elevation restricting member 417 and the hook-like portion 434 can be engaged.

  Next, the left swinging unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swinging unit 500. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swinging unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a of the gaming board 13 and the second specified winning opening 82, and the ball for winning the second specified winning opening 82 is A flow passage is provided on the inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b is disposed between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specified winning opening 82 for detecting passage of a ball. The sensor member 82 b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swinging unit 500. FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swinging unit 500 is configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 downward to the right in front view, and is a unit that effects by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swinging unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded back perspective view of the left swinging unit 500. As illustrated in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swinging unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a frame, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a swinging operation, and the base A driving device 530 which is fastened and fixed to the member 510 and generates a driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 which transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and covers on the front side And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the second specified winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of a plate-like body in front view L-shape, a shaft support hole 512 drilled in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the front view right end portion of the main body member, The first wall portion 513 disposed vertically above the hole 512 and configured in a flat plate shape to turn the surface in the front and rear direction, and one or more balls from the lower left end portion of the first wall portion 513 And a second wall portion 514 which is arranged in a curved plate shape and which faces the surface in the left and right direction, and a ball which is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 Down flow passage 515 to be flowed down, shaft support portion 516 disposed on the left lower side of shaft support hole 512 in a front view and protruding cylindrically on the front side, and lock disposed around the axis of shaft support portion 516 A wall 517, and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the pivot 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device; To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521 c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 is pivoted about the shaft support hole 512.

  The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from the left and right direction end portions to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a configured in an arc shape centering on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extended downward in the front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517 a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 is a long rod-like distribution base member 521, which is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and the distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 which is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a ball can flow down with the distribution base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 is a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the flow-down passage of the ball, and one ball along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a gap V1 for a minute, and a shaft support portion 521c which is formed in a cylindrical shape on the back side near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted into the shaft support hole 512 And an elongated hole 521d bored in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the axial support portion 521c along the extending direction, and an end on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a of the intermediate plate portion 521b Distribution convex part 521e configured in a manner that the width is shortened toward the radially outer side of the shaft support part 521c, and the clearance V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex part 521e in a rear view The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a is extended to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower part from the middle part is bent downward as compared to the upper part from the middle part, and the ball feeding part is thinned by scraping the front thick part at the lower end part 521 a1 is provided.

  The gap V1 is a space that allows the ball that has reached the right side in a front view of the distribution projection 521e to pass in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 is a plate-like plate-like portion 522a provided on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and extends in the form of a plate toward the back side from both lateral ends of the plate-like portion 522a. And an upper and lower wall portion 522b.

  The plate-like portion 522a is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and the ball receiving portion 522a1 bent at the back side at a portion of the lower end portion of the distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b roll the ball that has passed through the gap V1, and the inclination angle changes at the middle portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a. it can.

  In the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, a step is provided inside the tip portion. The step has the function of displacing the rolling balls in the opposing direction of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (the direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the balls.

  Further, the ball that has reached the lower end portion of the first passage forming member 520 is directed at the rear surface side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the ball before discharge can be decelerated, and the discharge of the ball can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 rotatably supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531. The drive gear 532 is meshed with the main gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main gear portion 541 supported by the support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532 and a first passage forming member projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side from an eccentric position of the main gear portion 541. The eccentric convex portion 542 which is inserted into the long hole 521 d of 520, is extended in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541 and configured to be able to abut against the locking wall portion 517 and to be able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518 Mainly includes an extension portion 543.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the plate-like main body member 551 disposed on the base member 510 and the second specified winning opening 82 at the right end in the front view of the main body member 551 and the rear end is the first A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 in contact with the wall portion 513; and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back side surface of the main body member 551; Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall 553 is a portion overlapping the guide wall 513 a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The ball having passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  The rocking operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 are front views of the rocking operation unit 500. FIG. In FIGS. 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is not shown, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 seen in cross section at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown. The outer shape is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  Further, in FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is the case where the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 39 (a) in the state where the minute convex portion 521e is disposed at the middle position of the pair of guide wall portions 513a. The state immediately before coming into contact with the connecting member 424 is illustrated in FIG. 40 in which the first passage forming member 520 is rocked by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. Ru.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is caused by the transmission device 540 being rotated and the position of the elongated hole 521d being moved with the movement of the eccentric convex portion 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric protrusion 542 intersects perpendicularly with the direction X2 coincident with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c). Do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 is directed to the shaft support portion 516 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520, the generation of the load for rotating the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. Thus, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  Further, in the release position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and abuts on the end of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extension portion 543 has both a role as a part used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the release position, the distribution projection 521e is disposed to face the guide wall 513a on the right side of the base member 510 in a front view. Therefore, the balls which reach the first wall 513 and pass between the guide walls 513a and 553 are distributed to the path on the left side in a front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and discharged out of the game area through the flow-down passage 515. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, at the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position, the distribution projection 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the ball reaching the first wall 513 and passing between the guide walls 513a and 553 is stopped flowing down by the distribution projection 521e (it stays on the tip of the distribution projection 521e and remains) ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, in the state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 abuts on the connection member 424, the distribution projection 521e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the ball reaching the first wall 513 and passing between the guide walls 513a and 553 is stopped flowing down by the distribution convex part 521e (while riding on the tip of the distribution convex part 521e, stay). As a result, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520 and is sent to the connection member 424 so that the ball is prevented from reaching the opposing wall 422 f 2.

  Here, since the opposite wall 422 f 2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall 424 b of the connection member 424 in the upper inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is connected to the connection member 424 in the lower inclined state (see FIG. 41). It protrudes from the lower end of the upper side wall 424 b to the left in a front view. Therefore, when the ball is thrown to the connection member 424 in the downward inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end portion of the opposing wall 422f2, the opposing wall 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the ball into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the ball can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2. Damage to the facing wall portion 422f2 can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric protrusion 542 and the direction X2 coincident with the extending direction of the long hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly Do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 is directed to the shaft support portion 516 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520, the generation of the load for rotating the transmission device 540 can be suppressed. Thus, the attitude of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In the connection position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is in contact with the inclined wall 517 b. Thereby, the extension portion 543 is abutted against the inclined wall portion 517b, and while the phase for stopping the transmission device 540 is stabilized, the extension portion is compared with the case where the load is locally applied to the extension portion 543. The durability of 543 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution projection 521e is disposed to face the guide wall 513a on the left side of the base member 510 in a front view. Therefore, the ball reaching the first wall 513 and passing between the guide walls 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right in the front view by the distribution projection 521e, and moves to the front through the gap V1. And then roll along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522 b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

  The flow of balls in the connected state will be described. First, the ball winning from the game area through the second variable winning device 82a to the second specified winning opening 82 moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion When coming into contact with 513, it moves down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves forward and backward toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522 Roll on the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the ball flows down the inside of the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if balls are supplied to the second specified winning opening 82 in a beaded connection, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by suppressing the bounce and the like of the balls. In addition, it is possible to change the direction of the speed of the ball by flowing down the ball sent in the front-rear direction along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520 It can be done.

  In the first passage forming member 520, the direction in which the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend is changed at the intermediate portion. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 are extended along the straight line Y1 from the middle portion to the base end side (axial support portion 521c side), and from the middle portion to the tip end side (opposite to the base end side) Up to the straight line Y2 which is inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the balls rolling on the inside of the first passage forming member 520 is slower in the time from the proximal end to the middle to reach the middle than in the time from the middle to the tip Become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Also, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is configured in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, in the connection position (see FIG. 42), the direction in which the ball is fed from the first passage forming member 520 The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced to the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 causes the first passage forming member 520 to rock, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path in which the ball flows down.

  Here, when the wall member arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the diameter of the sphere or less with respect to the wall member When the configuration is adopted, when the ball stagnates in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the ball is caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position shown in FIG. 40, a space larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution projection 521e and the second wall 514, and the distribution projection A wall member is not disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521 e and is opened. Therefore, the situation where the ball is caught in the rotational direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  The connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swinging unit 500. FIG. In FIGS. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section and the connecting member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521 e is visible.

  Further, FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate a state in which liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), and in FIG. 41, left swing unit 500 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 38). The left swing unit 500 is shown in FIG. 42 in the connected position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the tip end portion abuts on the lower side surface of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, Swing it. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even when the stop position of the drive-side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, the first The formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 can be suppressed. Thereby, the balls are prevented from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 is stabilized. Can.

  By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower side wall portion 424c, on which the ball descended from the first passage forming member 520 rolls, is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the balls are prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first channel forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 Because it is possible, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicated with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along its descending inclination, and the ball feeding to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  The swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of a ball of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the connection position shown in FIG. 42, the number of detected spheres of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (the ball remains in the first passage forming member 520). (Not shown) by causing the first passage forming member 520 to start swinging toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 out of the game area can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the distribution of the balls by the movement of the distribution convex portion 521e and the swinging of the first passage forming member 520 cause the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 to contact with each other. The driving force necessary for the movement to form the flow-down path of the ball in contact is shared (the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520 (see FIG. 36)) Since the states are synchronized, it is possible to avoid, for example, a situation in which the ball is introduced to the first passage forming member 520 in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.

  In addition, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and is a wall portion (forming the upper end) that divides the passage of the ball flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Double as As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case of distributing with other parts, and the balls distributed to the first path forming member 520 side can be reliably suspended by the hanging plate portion 521a and the path cover member It can be introduced into the passage between 522.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotation unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in the shape of a container whose one side is open, a guide member 620 provided on one side of the case member 610, and the cases. A drive mechanism 630 disposed between the facing of the member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotary member 640 rotationally driven by the drive force of the drive mechanism 630, and a throwing ball disposed on the inner circumferential side of the rotary member 640 A device 650 and a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotation member 640 are mainly provided.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 substantially circular in a front view, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and these wall portions 611 and 612 make one surface It is formed in the shape of an open container. The guide member 620 is formed in the shape of a circular disk in a front view, and is disposed (secured) at the standing front end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thus, an inner space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the inner space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotation member 640 in a displaceable manner, and the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are recessed in the front thereof. The connection link action groove 621 and the rising and falling link action groove 622 are U-shaped concave grooves that extend along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connection link member 644 and the rise and fall link described later of the rotating member 640 The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are respectively inserted.

  The groove widths of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are set to dimensions equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion link portions 644 a and 648 a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the rising and lowering link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link action groove 621 and the raising and lowering link action groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the connection link action groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the distance between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the rising link action groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to cause the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 to be undulated (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotation unit 600 with the rotation member 640, a part of the throwing device 650 and the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 50 is a front schematic view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

  As shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the connection link action groove 621 is curved in a circular arc with a radius R2 around the axis O and a large diameter portion 621a curved in a circular arc with a radius R1 around the axis O And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulation link action groove 622 includes a large diameter portion 622a curved in an arc at a radius R3 around the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b curved in an arc at a radius R4 around the axis O, and the large diameter portions It consists of a pair of connection part 622c which connects between 622a and the small diameter part 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the connection link action groove 621 and the large diameter portion 622a and the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are concentrically arranged around the axis O. In this case, the axial center O coincides with the rotation center when the rotation member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 act on the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  In addition, the pair of connection portions 621c of the connection link action groove 621 are disposed at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connection portions 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 are disposed at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the one connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the other connection portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, it is possible to offset the force exerted from one of the connection portions 622c of the relief link action groove 622 to the relief link member 648 and the force exerted from the other connection portion 622c to the relief link member 648. Thus, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In the present embodiment, the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the upset link action groove 622 are formed in different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the rising and falling link member 648 is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter The insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is a connection link in a state in which the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted into the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 while being inserted into any one of the portions 622b. It is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621 a or the small diameter portion 621 b of the action groove 621.

  The connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the distance between the division members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. Therefore, a relatively large reaction force is received from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing 644a and 648a from being simultaneously inserted into the connection portions 621c and 622c, necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotation member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a leading gear (a first transmission gear) 633a) has a central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train meshed with a gear 634a meshed with the end gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634 The first gear (first distribution gear 635a, 636a) is engaged with the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side distribution gear train, and the gear at the end of the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train (third distribution It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and a other-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the gears 635c and 636c). Second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members serving as the end (the output end of the drive mechanism 630) of the transmission path for transmitting the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force rotates itself, and the rotation causes the rotation member 640 to rotate. Here, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  51 (a) is a front view of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) is a one side rotation member 637 and the other along line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of a side rotation member 638.

  Since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the diagram of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are notched at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge thereof. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion engaged with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and the width (the distance between the opposing surfaces is increased from the open side toward the concave side) In the front view (axial direction view) substantially V-shaped to be narrowed. As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is It can be rotated.

  The one side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connection wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b. The connection wall 637c is formed in a curved shape in a front view (axial view) arc shape around the axial center of the one side rotation drive member 637, and the open side of the engagement portion 637b (one side rotation drive member 637 Only the inner surfaces of the outer edge side of) are connected, and the inner surfaces of the recessed portion deep side of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, engagement and release of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and there is a possibility that the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one side rotation drive member 637 is increased, the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 needs a large output.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connection wall 637c is formed only on the release side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged And weight reduction can be made to be compatible effectively. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmission body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape in a front view and a depressed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the depressed portion at the central portion. An overhanging portion 634 b is formed in a flange shape projecting radially outward from the portion.

  A pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superimposed on three positions (that is, positions at an interval of 120 degrees) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the back side of the guide member 620. The overhanging portion 634 b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the opposing pair of holding collars 623 and 624. Thus, the central transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be restricted by bringing the outer circumferential surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer circumferential surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 52) is restricted by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape in a front view (a view in the rotation axis direction of the center transmission member 634). Accordingly, the outer circumferential surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer circumferential surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a circumscribed relationship (that is, point contact) with each other. Thus, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Further, by thus holding the outer edge side (the overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since it is not necessary to support it and a space for arranging components for supporting the shaft is not necessary, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for the throwing device 650, which will be described later.

  Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, the central transmission member 634 is disposed at a position concentric with the axis O, which is the rotation center of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission is made to the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633 b and the third distribution gears 635 c and 636 c are disposed in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are disposed at positions different in phase by 180 degrees (that is, positions opposed to each other across the axis O).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633 b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633 a, and the center is rotated with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633 b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated, and the rotation is performed by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution. It is transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 via the gears 635c and 636c, and the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 rotate. Be done.

  As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is engaged with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 by the rotational drive force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotational drive member The 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the drive of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axial center O of the rotary member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotational drive members 637 and 638 are viewed in the axial center O direction. In the above, the inner side (the axial center O direction side) of the outer edge portion of the rotating member 640 can be provided. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one side and the other side rotational driving members 637 and 638 do not protrude outward beyond the outer shape of the rotating member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the state where the guide member 620 is disposed in the case member 610, the engaging portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portions 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 through the engagement of the engaging portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, opposite to each other across the axis O). Therefore, as described later, the rotation position of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized by separating the position (engagement position) for applying the driving force to the rotation member 640 to the maximum.

  In addition, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are disposed in a posture (rotational position) in which the phases of the engagement portion 637b and the engagement portion 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637 b or the engaging portion 638 b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637 b or the engaging portion 638 b engages with the engaged portion 641. Are arranged to be avoided (allowing one and the other to be disengaged simultaneously). Therefore, as will be described later, intermittent transmission of the driving force from the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. As described above, the rotation member 640 is a front-view annular member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotation mechanism 630, and in a posture that is concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guide member 620, the guide member 620. It is disposed on the front side of the In the present embodiment, the rotation member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (leftward) in a front view. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

  54 (a) is a front view of the rotation member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotation member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). 55 is a rear view of the rotation member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) dividing members DV, and the plurality of dividing members DV are endlessly connected to each other along the circumferential direction. Thus, it is formed in an annular shape in a front view.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed so as to be able to change the distance between the adjacent divided members DV. That is, in the rotating member 640, a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are circumferentially connected at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV are narrower than the first interval And a second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed. Note that, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the divided members DV transitions from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa) Section is formed.

  Fig. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the divided member DV, and Fig. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the divided member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the divided member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the divided member DV. 56 to 58, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent divided members DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connection structure of the divided members DV.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the to-be-detected portion 641 c is formed on a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the other divided members DV are formed. Formation of the to-be-detected part 641c is abbreviate | omitted. The division members DV in which the detection portions 641c are formed and the division members DV in which the formation of the detection portions 641c is omitted have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the detection portions 641c. Therefore, in the following, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the divided member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 on which the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. Disposed on the front side of the front side main body 643 and a connection link member 644 whose proximal end is rotatably supported between the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643. And the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 held displaceably by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 so as to be slidably displaced. And an undulating link member 648.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangular shape in a front view It is disposed in such a posture as to protrude from the back of one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56 (b)) of the back side main body 642.

  A facing portion 641a facing the back surface of the back main body 642 at a predetermined distance is formed on the attachment surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back main body 642, and the facing portion 641a and the back main body are formed. The outer edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surfaces 642 and 642. Thereby, floating of the divided member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front surface of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a cylindrical shape is rotatably supported on the side of the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b can have its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the movement plane of the divided member DV) and its outer peripheral surface can be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in a posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance at the time of the division member DV being displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-like portion to be detected 641 c is formed on the opposite side of the surface to be attached of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642. The to-be-detected portion 641c is a plate-like portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed in the guide member 680, and is in a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the movement plane of the division member DV). Ru.

  The back side main body 642 is a portion mounted on the front surface of the guide member 620 and sliding on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotation member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. In the state where the rotation member 640 is disposed in the guide member 620, the back side main body 642 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body portion 642 is disposed in a radiation straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

  The back side main body 642 is a front face of one side (the lower side in FIG. 57) of the connecting link opening 642a and the ups and downs link opening 642b which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A shaft support portion 642c which is formed and pivotally supports the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion protruding from the back surface of the other side in the longitudinal direction (the upper side in FIG. 58) And 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent divided member DV is slidably inserted, and the insertion of the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a allows the division member to be divided. The DV can be connected to the adjacent dividing member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip end of the insertion portion 644 a inserted into the connecting link opening 642 a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620 when the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a has a connection link opening 642a. By sliding along the distance L, it is possible to allow the posture of the connection link member 644 to change in accordance with the action from the connection link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear side main body 642 can be generated, and the distance between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The relief link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the relief link member 648 is slidably inserted, and the relief link member 648 is a guide member for the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted in the relief link opening 642b. It is inserted into the undulation link action groove 622 of 620.

  The opening width of the opening for relief link 642b is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the relief link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulation link opening 642b.

  When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulation link action groove 622 of the guiding member 620, the insertion portion 648a is the opening 642b for the undulation link. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be undulated by sliding along the same.

  As described above, since the bearing portion 642c is formed on one side (the lower side in FIG. 57) of the back side main body 642, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is viewed in front view with the engaged portion 641. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637 b and 638 b of the respective rotational driving members 637 and 638 and the dividing member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620, the displacement is made adjacent It can be easily transmitted to the dividing member DV via the connecting link member 644.

  The bending portion 642d is provided to project from the back of the other side (the upper side in FIG. 58) of the back side main body 642 in the longitudinal direction, and the protruding tip is opposed to the back side of the back side main body 642 with a predetermined distance. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the bent portion of the protruding tip and the back side main body 642. Thereby, floating of the divided member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front surface of the guide member 620 can be suppressed.

  The bent portion 642d is disposed in a posture in which the base portion can be in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge portion of the guide member 620, and the facing distance between the base portion of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is The dimension is set equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. Thus, the displacement of the divided member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be restricted, so that the main body member DV (rear side main body 642) remains in the posture along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620.

  The front side main body 643 is a member formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in front view having substantially the same size as the rear side main body 642, and is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a, and a pivot portion 643b formed on the back of one longitudinal direction side (the lower side in FIG. 58) and pivotally supporting the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the back side main body 642 (shaft support portion 642c) and And a support plate 643c which is provided so as to protrude from the front surface and rotatably supports the partition plate 647.

  The relief link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the relief link member 648 is slidably disposed, and extends in parallel with the relief link opening 642b. That is, by causing the relief link member 648 to slide along the relief link slide groove 643a, the insertion portion 648a slides along the relief link opening 642b.

  The width dimension of the other side in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the width dimension of one side in the longitudinal direction in the front view. That is, the width dimension of the portion positioned on the inner peripheral side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion positioned on the outer peripheral side of the rotation member 640 so as to form a wedge in a front view. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be made to be close to each other, and the space required for the disposition of the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are in contact with the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connection link member 644 is a long member, and the proximal end side is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the front side main body 643 and the columnar insertion portion on the front end side 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent divided member DV. The working groove 621 is inserted.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link operation groove 621. Therefore, during rotation of the rotation member 640, positional deviation of the division member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be minimized, and the interval between the division members DV can be easily maintained constant. Thereby, since the position variation of to-be-detected part 641c can be suppressed, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 (refer FIG. 71) can be aimed at improvement.

  Note that the base end side (that is, the pivoting portions 642c and 643b of the respective main bodies 642 and 643) rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connection link member 644 is from the connection link opening 642a. Is also disposed at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the proximal end side of the connection link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (a view in the axial center O direction of the rotation member 640).

  As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one side and the other side rotational driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the divided members DV, and the one side and the other side rotational driving members 637 and 638 rotate. When the division member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the division member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent division member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The ups and downs link member 648 is a member held slidably movably in the ups and downs link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643. A columnar insertion portion 648a is formed on the back side, and an action groove 648b is formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, in the relief link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 via the relief link opening 642b of the back side main body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648 b is a portion for acting on the operated portion 646 d of the display plate 646 by the sliding displacement of the elevation link member 648 to make the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 undulate, and the action groove 648 b The groove is formed to extend linearly along the sliding direction, and the acting portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the opposing surfaces of the groove-like portion.

  The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and the action groove 648b of the relief link member 648 And a plate-like operated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. The operated portion 646d is bent in a substantially S-shape in a front view, and therefore, when the undulating link member 648 is slide-displaced, the operated portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement, The display plate 646 can be rotated about the shaft portion 646b.

  The dividing plate 647 has a plate-like plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in a front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b And a pivot 647c rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotating unit 600 is configured to simulate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously provided in the circumferential direction and drops a thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space enclosed by the display plate 646 and the division plate 647 of one division member DV and the division plate 647 of the division member DV adjacent to each other is a pocket, and the display plate 646 (the plate portion 646a) Alternatively, the color is black and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, one display plate 646 has a green color and displays a predetermined mark (star shape). In addition, in the rotating member 640, only the display plate 646 located in the first section S1 is viewed by the player. That is, the display plate 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed on the front side of the display plate 646 so as to be invisible to the player.

  The plate holding member 645 is provided with a shaft support portion 645a for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated with the shaft portion 646b as the rotation center in accordance with the slide displacement of the rising and lowering link member 648. The rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated about the shaft 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the dividing member DV in the state of being disposed in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are: It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division member DV in the state arrange | positioned to 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 illustrate a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for ease of understanding, and the illustration of the connection link member 644, the detection portion 641c, and the bending portion 642d is omitted. As shown in FIG. 59, when the dividing member DV is disposed in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is a small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guiding member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slidingly displaced on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotary member 640, the axis O side), Thus, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is disposed in the horizontal posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is disposed in the standing posture.

  Note that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface (that is, the movement plane of the divided member DV) of the back side main body 642, and the standing posture is a plate of the division plate 647. The portion 647a is in an attitude that is orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the movement plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the dividing member DV is disposed in the second section S2, the large diameter portion 622a (see FIG. 50) of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guiding member 620. Is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slidingly displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 to be disposed in the inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is from the standing posture The display plate 646 is inclined to the side of the plate portion 646a and arranged in the inclined posture.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, by rotating the display plate 646 with the slide displacement of the relief link member 648, The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Thus, it is not necessary to separately provide the relief link action groove and the relief link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and in both mechanisms. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be made common. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier in weight than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (ie, the state in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the dividing plate 647 is in the standing posture, the rotation action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can form a horizontal posture by being rotated by its own weight in the direction to be tilted downward, and the rotation of the display plate 646 (self-weight) Is transmitted to the dividing plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the pivot portion 647c, so that the dividing plate 647 can be lifted to form a standing posture. Therefore, even in the case where the rotation is inhibited by the adhesion of dirt, dust or the like, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection length of the display plate 646 from the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a is set to be larger than the projection length of the partition portion 647a from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be made closer to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by using the weight of the display plate 646.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. The throwing device 650 is a device for throwing the ball B to the rotating member 640, is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the throwing device 650. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 62, a state in which the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is illustrated, and the passage member 655 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the throwing device 650 has a case body 651 formed in the shape of a container whose front side is open, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece. A mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B spherically formed of a translucent material are mainly included.

  The case body 651 has a bottom wall portion 651a substantially circular in a front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b erected from the bottom wall portion 651a to the front, and a radially outer side from an outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b And an overhanging wall portion 651c formed in a flange-like manner, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the guide member 620, whereby the standing front end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b Are substantially aligned with the front surface of the rotation member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A ball holding portion 652 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. In the ball holding portion 652, a spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed on the front, and the depression is taken as the holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is disposed in the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the ball throwing device 650 is disposed with the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 positioned at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is the outer wall portion The inner peripheral surface 651 b (inner peripheral passage 651 c 1) is rolled to be held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 to FIG.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. As shown in FIG. 64 is a front view of the throwing device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a view when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is disposed at the separation position. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus 660 in the closed state. In FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed is shown for ease of understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a back case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, and a front case 662 disposed on the front of the back case 661; A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664 are provided. .

  Shafts 661a and 661b are provided in a protruding manner on the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. In the crank member 663, a gear 663a in which a pinion gear 676 is engaged is engraved on the outer peripheral surface, and a pin portion 663b is protruded at a position eccentric from the rotation center (shaft 661a). Further, in the arm member 664, a sliding groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted is linearly extended, and a rotation center (shaft 661b is provided with respect to the sliding groove 664a. In the opposite position sandwiching), a curved portion 664b in a front view shape obtained by dividing an annular shape into halves is formed.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated via the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663 b of the crank member 663 is By acting on the slide groove 664 a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with the shaft 661 b as the center of rotation.

  That is, the arm member 664 causes the curved position of the curved portion 664b to follow the outer peripheral portion of the ball holding portion 652 to hold the ball B in the ball holding portion 652 (see FIG. 64). It is possible to rotate (swing) between a separated position (see FIG. 65) where the ball B is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner circumferential passage 651c1 by being separated from the portion 652.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664 b (a range of about 90 degrees of the central angle of the side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661 b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664 c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like member that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side is rotatably supported by the curved portion 664b and has a distal end side. By the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (peripheral surface side) of the head, it is maintained in a posture lifted upward (radially inward).

  Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c with the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center. When the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is lifted as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the sphere B in the sphere holding portion 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed in such a size that the ball B can be displaced in a state where the arm member 664 is disposed at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664 b and the inner diameter of the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player and an external force (vibration) is input, the ball B can be displaced with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced in accordance with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Referring back to FIGS. 61 and 62, description will be made. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651 c 1) of the outer wall portion 651 b. It is held on the holding piece 677 in the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece inserting and retracting mechanism 670 is formed so that the holding piece 677 can be inserted and withdrawn between the projecting position and the inserting position, and the ball B can be inserted into the inserting position by inserting the holding piece 677 into the inserting position. Is thrown on the divided member DV (display plate 646) of any of the divided members DV. Here, the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retraction mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is disposed in the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is a holding piece retraction mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is disposed in the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece projection / retraction mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position, and FIG. 68 (b) is a holding at line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 16 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of a single-in / out mechanism 670. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece projecting / retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69 (b) is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). 18 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 and disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. Back case 671, a front case 672 disposed on the front of the back case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the back case 671 and the front case 672, and a slide member thereof A drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving 673, and a holding piece 677 which is brought out and retracted according to the slide displacement of the slide member 673.

  The rear case 671 is provided with two pairs of roller members 674 facing each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidably displaceable between the roller members 674 of each set. The rear case 671 is provided with a sliding base 671a in the form of a rectangular plate in top view viewed from the circumferential direction one end side (lower part) toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672 The slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the rear side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of

  The slide member 673 has a pin portion 673a protruding from one circumferential end (lower portion) thereof and a rack gear 673b having a pinion gear 676 meshed with the other circumferential circumferential end (information portion) on the inner circumferential surface. Is engraved along the Further, in the holding piece 677, a sliding groove 677a through which the pin portion 673a of the sliding member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape. That is, the sliding groove 677a has its one end side (right side in FIG. 66) offset to the front side than the other end side (left side in FIG. 66).

  Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated to slide the slide member 673 through the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or retracted to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 is slidably displaceable between a projecting position (see FIG. 68) which protrudes to the front side and a retracted position (see FIG. 69) which is sunk to the back side.

  Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68B and 69B) and the inner circumferential surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner circumferential passage 651c1) And a curved surface 677b which is smoothly curved in the circumferential direction with the inner circumferential passage 651c1 and extends to the edge of the curved surface 677b and is directed to the front side (the left side in FIGS. 68B and 69B). A rising inclined surface 677c is formed to be inclined according to and a falling inclined surface 677d connected to the edge of the rising inclined surface 677c and inclined downward toward the front side.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the projecting position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the ball is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner circumferential passage 651c1 to curve the holding piece 677. The rolling of the ball B reaching the surface 677b to the front side (left side in FIG. 68B) is restricted by the rising inclination of the rising inclined surface 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b) Can.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is sunk from the projecting position to the back side and disposed at the sunk position (see FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b)), the front side of the front case 672 faces the back (Fig. 69 (b). The ball B, whose movement to the right) is restricted, is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d, over the ascending inclined surface 677c as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (rear side). Thereby, the ball B can be rolled along the downward inclination of the downward inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown to the front side (the divided member DV of the rotation member 640).

  The curved surface 677 b is smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 on both sides in the circumferential direction, and therefore the ball B dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolling on one inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 is a curve of the holding piece 677 It can pass over the surface 677 b and roll to the other inner circumferential passage 651 c 1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 on one circumferential side and the inner circumferential passage 651 c 1 on the other circumferential side via the curved surface 677 b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located lower than the inner circumferential passage 651c1, when the ball B loses its momentum and its rolling converges, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. It can be done.

  Referring back to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is disposed on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is positioned on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersing operation (immersion to the immersing position) of the holding piece 677 is divided member DV of the rotating member 640 And a return passage 655b serving as a passage for returning the ball B sent from the division member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The ball sending passage 655a has a width substantially the same as the downward inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670, and has a substantially U-shaped cross section groove portion 655a1 and a front surface from the groove portion 655a1. A front portion 655a2 which is continuous with the side edge portion and which is substantially flush with the display plate 646 in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, and erected from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2 And a pair of opposing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same intervals as the opposing intervals of the partition plates 647.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece advancing and retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B which rolls the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove 655a1, and the extending direction of the groove 655a1 By rolling along, it is possible to throw the ball B while suppressing rattling.

  In addition, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV, and the facing distance between the pair of facing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the facing distance of the dividing plate 647 of the dividing member DV. The ball B can be smoothly placed on the display plate 646 of the divided member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotary member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) in which the dividing plate 647 of the dividing member DV matches the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls on the downstream side when the ball B sent from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and a downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. It has an upright portion 655b2 which is erected and curved to turn the rolling direction of the ball B to the back side.

  The rolling portion 655b1 is disposed on the inner peripheral side edge of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side and in the front side of the ball holding portion 652b in a front view of the ball throwing device 650. In addition, the rolling portion 6551b1 is inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and the downstream side is inclined downward to the ball holding portion 652.

  The ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and transported in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is radially inward by the action of the dividing plate 647 and the return guide 681 b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out and sent to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls the rolling portion 655b1 to the downstream side and is dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. Ru.

  Referring back to FIGS. 43 to 48, description will be made. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower portion of the rotation member 640, and guides the ball B on the dividing member DV of the rotation member 640 during conveyance accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 640 (ie, The ball B is supported from below, and the detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 disposed in the case member 610, a plate-like transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, and a back side of the transmission plate 682 And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in a circular arc shape in front view), and a guide surface 681 a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side . The guide surface 681a is disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotation member 640, and faces the sphere B disposed on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B, which is disposed on the divided member DV of the rotation member 640 and is conveyed as the rotation member 640 rotates, is supported from below.

  Further, on the inner circumferential surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681 b is formed which is continuous with the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681 a. The return guide 681 b is a portion for sending the ball B transported along with the rotation of the rotation member 640 to the return passage 655 b of the passage member 655, and has a smaller width than the guide surface 681 a. By being formed in a shape projecting inward, it is disposed to face the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B is placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction as the rotating member 640 rotates, the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV returns the guide The ball B is pressed against the inner circumferential surface of 681 b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681 b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655 b.

  Here, even if the formation of the return guide 681 b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to a position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647 a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655 b, the partition plate The ball B can be dropped to the return path 655b along the descending slope of 647. However, in this case, since the ball B is transported upward before the ball B starts rolling by its own weight, the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes high, and Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending slope, the momentum when the ball B drops is large. As a result, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681 b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped to the return passage 655 b can be lowered and the ball B slides with the return guide 681 b. Since the ball is thrown to the return path 655b while being being carried out, the ball throwing speed can be reduced. As a result, damage to the return passage 655 b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the division member DV (display plate 646) of the rotation member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the sphere B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is It extends upward to a position facing the throwing passage 655a (front portion 655a2) of the passage member 655. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball B thrown to the division member DV of the rotation member 640 from the throwing apparatus 650 jumps out outside.

  In addition, the transmission plate 682 is used not only for the dividing member DV into which the ball B is thrown (that is, the dividing member DV having the same phase as the front portion 655a2 of the throwing passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the dividing member DV (the ball B). Since the division member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction is also formed in a size (width dimension) which can partially face, the ramping of the ball B thrown from the throwing passage 655 a Convergence can be facilitated, and the ball B can be stably transported to the return guide 681 b.

  On the other hand, the transmitting plate 682 has a size (width dimension) capable of facing the dividing member DV to which the ball B is thrown and the dividing member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the dividing member DV. And it does not face with respect to the dividing member DV located downstream from the adjacent dividing member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 in the transport direction downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the ball B and the return guide 681 b, and the player visually recognizes the transport of the ball B It can be easy.

  In addition, since the whole of the transmitting plate 682 is formed of the light transmitting material, it is possible to allow the player to see through the member or the ball B located on the back side. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing passage 655a and falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV while being supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can be made to visually recognize a series of modes being transported.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681 a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681 a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base 681). One end side of the cantilever plate 683 is rotatably supported by the base 681 by a shaft 685 at one circumferential end side, and the other circumferential end is fixed by the elastic force of a plate spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed at the base 681 It is maintained in a posture of being lifted upward (radially inward).

  In the posture in which the other circumferential end of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is off, and when the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B is The weight depresses the cantilever plate 683 with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and turns on the limit switch. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 is disposed at the proper position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotation member 640 and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is set to a predetermined value or less, the posture in which the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. The limit switch is turned off.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640, and is formed as a noncontact sensor in which the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are disposed opposite to each other. The opposing spaces of the parts are disposed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction while being positioned on the movement locus of the detection subject 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54). The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641 c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) division members DV adjacent in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensor 684, and the rotation members 640 correspond to a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). The division member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction each time it is rotated by the rotation amount).

  In this case, as described above, the to-be-detected portion 641c is formed on a part of the plurality of divided members DV (15 in the present embodiment) divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV Formation of the to-be-detected part 641c is abbreviate | omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detection portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light reception by the light reception portion of the light emitted from the light emission portion is blocked by the detection portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detection portion 641c is not formed is disposed, the light receiving portion can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, as described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the detection sensors 684.

  In the present embodiment, two (on / off) detection results are performed by the six detection sensors 684 based on the presence or absence of the detection target 641c of the divided member DV, so 64 (= 2 to the sixth power) A combination of streets can be formed. In this case, since the number of division members DV is 30, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of division members DV is located at the reference position, as described later. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72 to FIG. 77, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described. First, the operation of changing the distance between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640. FIG. FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a portion of the guide member 620 and the rotation member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, in FIGS. 72 and 73, only the back side main body 642, the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 of the components of the dividing member DV are illustrated. In FIG. 73, the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating member 640 is a member formed rotatably about the axis O (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620), and a plurality of divided members DV It is formed in the endless shape which connected the circumferential direction. That is, while the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642, each dividing member DV is back side of the dividing member DV to which the insertion portion 644a at the tip side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent. The connection link action groove 621 is inserted through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the back side main body 642 of the divided member DV is in contact with the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620 with the sliding roller 641b on one longitudinal side and the bending portion 642 on the other longitudinal side. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture with respect to the guide member 620 is a posture in which the axial center O is located on the extension of the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (that is, radiation about the axial center O) Maintained in a straight posture). That is, only movement with the posture maintained is permitted.

  In this case, the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is formed closer to the base end side (the side rotatably supported by the shaft) of the connection link member 644 than the small diameter portion 621b. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the posture in which the connection link member 644 is tilted with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 The back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the space between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be set as a large space (first space).

  On the other hand, the small diameter portion 621b of the connection link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side pivotally supported rotatably) of the connection link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted through the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the connection link member 644 is placed along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642, Side bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the space between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be set as a small space (second space).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is a rendering device formed by imitating a roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, by causing the player to visually recognize the identification information to be displayed on the display plate 646, an effect is performed. Therefore, in consideration of the player's visibility, it is preferable that the display plate 646 (display of identification information) be large, and in order to secure variations of the rendering effect, the number of display plates 646 (identification information It is preferable that there are many kinds.

  In this case, in consideration of the player's visibility, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to secure a certain size or more, but the size is maintained. However, if the number of displayed identification information (the number of display plates 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 is increased and the rotating member 640 can not fit in the predetermined arrangement space, but can fit in the predetermined space. If the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display plates 646) decreases, and it is not possible to secure variations of the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the interval narrower than the first interval in the first section S1 As described above, it is possible to form the second section S2 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at an interval of 2 on the rotating member 640, and as described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1. The player is made to visually recognize (the display plate 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

  Therefore, compared with the case where all the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. While the display of the identification information (ie, the display plate 646) secures a certain size or more, the number of display of the identification information (the number of display plates 646) can be increased. As a result, it is impossible to secure the player's visibility and the variation of the rendering effect.

  Here, in the first section S1, as described above, the dividing member DV is arranged such that the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is in the horizontal posture (the posture parallel to the movement plane of the dividing member DV), The identification information displayed on the screen 646 can be easily viewed from the player.

  On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, the dividing member DV is in the posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 lifts the tip end side relative to the horizontal position in the first section S1. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the length in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space necessary for the arrangement can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed displaceably (rotatable) on the upper surface of the front side main body 643, and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is divided by the adjacent divided members DV (plate holding It can be lifted above the top surface of the member 645) (ie, at a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the division members DV can be brought close to a position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 contact each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, it is possible to shorten the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 and to reduce the space required for the arrangement of the rotating member.

  Next, the drive operation of the rotation member 640 by the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 seen from the front is illustrated.

  FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c) and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated by 30 degrees, 60 degrees and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. In FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is illustrated in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated using.

  Here, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as described above. In the drive operation of the rotation member 640 by these, the same drive operation demonstrates only the drive operation by the one side rotation drive member 637, and the description of the drive operation by the other side rotation drive member 638 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is partially the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. It is disposed in the overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, the engaging portion 637 b is rotatable in a state of being engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circular movement trajectory of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a diameter smaller than the circular movement trajectory of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. And the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided members DV via the respective connection link members 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is circumferentially It is rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is formed on one longitudinal side of the rear side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotary member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the rotary member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the amount of rotation of the one side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased. ). Therefore, the apparent speed reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive (in particular, rotational drive from the stopped state) of the rotary member 640 can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, since the drive mechanism 630 includes the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, and they are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53) The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even in the case where the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, since the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53) The driving force from each rotation drive member 637, 638 can be applied to two of the most spaced apart of the rotation members 640 (a plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, displacement (rotation) of the rotation members 640 It can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the first insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. In this embodiment, one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side are present, in which there are three types of states, the second state inserted into the small diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted into the connection portion 621c. The rotation drive member 638 can apply a driving force to the division member DV in the third state (that is, the engagement portions 637 b and 638 b can be engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the division member DV in the third state) ) Are arranged.

  Thus, the driving force can be applied to the divided members DV in the state of transitioning the distance between the adjacent divided members DV from the first distance to the second distance (or the opposite). Since the division member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c, the rotation (the movement of each division member DV in the circumferential direction) of the entire rotation member 640 in which the plurality of division members DV are endlessly connected By directly driving the divided member DV which receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the plurality of divided members DV are endless Can be stably displaced (rotated) as a whole.

  The period in which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the division member DV completely matches the period in which the division member DV is in the third state described above. It is not necessary, as long as the period during which the former driving force is transmitted and the period during which the latter is in the third state overlap at least in part.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the upset link action groove 622 are formed at different positions. That is, when the dividing member DV is in the above-described third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the dividing member DV is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connection portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

  As a result, the reaction force is not received from both the connection portion 621 c of the connection link action groove 621 and the connection portion 622 c of the undulation link action groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be made different. As a result, the necessary drive force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, since the one side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation driving member 638 are disposed with their phases (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637 b and 638 b) different from each other, displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing a relationship between a state of engagement or release of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the division member DV and a phase. In FIG. 75, the state relationship diagram of the upper stage corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the state relationship diagram of the lower stage corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638, respectively. Further, in FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. When the phase at the time of starting the movement is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotary drive member 637 continues until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (ie, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position) The first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the division member DV, while the engagement is released when the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °. The transmission of the driving force to the division member DV is released.

  After that, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one side rotation driving member 637 are the case of the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and release states (i.e., engagement between approximately 100 degrees of rotation and release between approximately 20 degrees of rotation) are respectively repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions of the other side rotation drive member 638 also have the same engagement and release as those of the one side rotation drive member 637 described above. State of the rotation angle (i.e., engagement between the rotation angle of about 100 degrees and release of the rotation angle of about 20 degrees).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are disposed with different phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b and 638b). Ru. That is, in the other side rotational drive member 638, the phase at which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is The first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which engagement is started.

  Thus, while one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the other-side rotation drive member 638 is disengaged from the split member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), one side The phases (rotational positions) of the engagement portions 637b and 638b are set such that the other of the rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 engages with the divided member DV. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the state in which the engagement with the division member DV is released is simultaneously formed in both the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. As a result, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized by suppressing the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV, if the transmission of the driving force from the drive mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the distance between the divided members DV is likely to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture as the whole rotation member 640 becomes unstable, and the displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if either one of the one side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is engaged, and the driving force to the rotation member 640 Since it can form the state which is always transmitted, it can be easy to keep the interval of division members DV constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the detection operation of the rotational position of the rotation member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotation member 640, and illustrates a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the division member DV is developed in a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684 and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol "on, off". Further, in FIG. 76, the detection target portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each detection sensor 684 is a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,... Using the reference numerals “A to F” “1 to 10, 30” attached in the drawing. In addition to the detection sensor F, the division members DV are referred to as a first division member DV, a second division member DV,.

  As shown in FIG. 76A, when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) detectable by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV to the sixth The divided members DV are disposed at phases detectable by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light reception by the light receiving unit of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked by the detection target 641 c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Thus, while the detection state is turned off, in the detection sensor B, the light receiving portion can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the detection state is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV is circumferentially (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)) By moving in the left direction of (1), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (the to-be-detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the divided members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided members DV (detected portion 641 c) In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

  Even after that, each time the rotation member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division members DV to be detected by the detection sensors A to F are changed (shifted by one), and the number of division members DV When the operation is repeated by 30 in the form (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state shown in FIG. 76 (a) is restored.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detection portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detection portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detection portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined arrangement at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement is a combination of the presence / absence of the detection target 641c (ie, the detection sensor A even if any adjacent six division members DV are taken out of the 30 division members DV connected in the circumferential direction). Each of the detection states of to F means sequences that are different combinations.

  Therefore, a detection sensor is created by creating in advance a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of detection) and storing them in the ROM. The phase (rotational position) of the rotary member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table each time the detection is performed by the A to F. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality (30 in the present embodiment) of the dividing members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, the rotary member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the pulse number of the pulse signal is accumulated and added, based on the accumulated pulse number. The amount of rotation (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure or the like of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684, a shift occurs between the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulse number, and the phase of the rotation member 640 is accurate. Can not be detected. That is, even if the detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection results, and the influence on the detection results is accumulated each time the detection failure occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detection target portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640, and the movement of the plurality of detection target portions 641c Since the plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) disposed on the locus are provided, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on only the current detection result detected by the detecting sensors A to F, and in the detection of the phase of the rotating member 640, the past of the detecting sensors A to F Therefore, even if a detection failure occurs in the past, the detection result is not affected by the detection failure, so that the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected accurately.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641 c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the throwing device 650 to any divided member DV (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 imitating a roulette) among the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction. be able to.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set based on the interval of the divided members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided members DV in the first section S1 Space required for the arrangement of the detection sensors A to F, as compared with the case where the distance between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference, by arranging the detection target portion 64 Can be secured easily, and design freedom can be enhanced.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are disposed at positions where the detection portion 641 c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging the detection sensors A to F is secured. Since it is necessary to do so, limitations occur in narrowing the distance (second distance) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are disposed on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (the second interval) of the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not limited. The distance of 2 can be made narrower. As a result, it is possible to reduce the space required for the disposition of the rotation member 640.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the two detection results (on / off) based on the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c of the divided member DV are respectively detected by the six detection sensors 684, so 64 (= 2) can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of dividing members DV is thirty, it is sufficient to have five detection sensors 684 (that is, a combination of 32 (= 2 5 powers can be formed)). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (the light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c), so at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to that state. The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can not be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all the detection sensors 684 of the six detection sensors 684 are turned off (a state in which the light is not blocked by the detection portion 641c) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (blocked by the detection portion 641), so that all phases (rotation In the position, the timing at which the detection result of the detection sensor 684 is acquired can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion of the rotation member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has its plate portion 646a disposed in a horizontal posture, and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The opposite side (see FIG. 77, left side) is facing the side of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent dividing member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the side surface of the display plate 646 opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a is curved in an arc shape (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b and disposed in a horizontal posture, the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a is the plate holding member 645 of the division member DV adjacent thereto. As a result, interference with the side surface of the plate portion 646a can be suppressed, and as a result, the distance between the side (arc side surface) opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.

  Thereby, in the first section S1, when attempting to relatively displace the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV in the direction to narrow the gap (first gap) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Such relative displacement can be restricted by the side surface being in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it is possible to suppress positional deviation of the detection target portions 641c of the divided members DV in the direction of narrowing their intervals, and as a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is the end of the connection link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end portion in the extending direction, FIG. 73 (a (See FIG. 73 (a)), when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV attempt to make a relative displacement in a direction to widen their spacing (first spacing), The phase displacement can be restricted by the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 being in contact with the end of the connection link opening 642a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress displacement of the detection portions 641c of the divided members DV in the direction of widening their intervals, and as a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each embodiment described above, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is disposed at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 , And the tip wall member 2560 which opens and closes a passage. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swinging unit 2500 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 78, the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position is illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the left swinging unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the rear right of the first wall portion 513 in the front view, an extending direction of the distribution base member 2521 and an elongated hole 2521d. It mainly includes a first passage forming member 2520 which is substantially in a straight line with the extending direction, and a tip wall member 2560 which opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  The base member 2510 includes a lateral flow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall 513a. Although the outer shape of the introductory cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introductory cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical concept is the same, so the description will be omitted in this embodiment.

  The lateral downflow passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 is a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that constitutes one side of the flow-down passage of the ball, a long hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution projection 2521g opposite to the distribution projection 521e in the front view right side and the front surface side of the hanging plate in the front view right side of the second distribution projection 2521g And a discharge recess 2521 h recessed from the side surface.

  In the lower end portion of the hanging plate portion 2521a, a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion on the side facing the passage cover member 2522 on the lower side wall surface (left side in FIG. 78) And an axial support hole 2521 a 3 circularly bored in a direction opposite to the passage cover member on the opposite side to 2522.

  The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion which forms an opening on the lower side surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening constituted by the recessed portion 2521a by the rotational operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is pivotally supported by the pin member on the rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522 Ru.

  The second distribution convex portion 2521 g is a portion configured to have substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521 e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge recess 2521 h is disposed with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between the first recess 521 and the first wall 513, and reaches the first wall 513 and reaches the right of the second distribution protrusion 2521 g in the front view The distributed balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521 h into the lateral flow passage 2515 and then discharged out of the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 extends in a plate shape from a plate-like plate-like portion 2522 a which is provided on the front side of the distribution base member 2521 and both ends of the plate-like portion 2522 a in the width direction And an upper and lower wall portion 2522b.

  The plate-like portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and the axial support hole 2522a2 which is formed in a circular shape coaxially with the axial support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower end. Prepare. The axial support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes for rotatably supporting the tip wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portion 2522b is provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 which is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and which forms an opening through which a ball can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 and rotates in a rod-like pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 It mainly includes a body member 2561 of a substantially Z shape in a front view substantially pivotally supported, and a torsion spring 2562 biasing the body member 2561 clockwise in a front view.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured in such a manner that one arm is fixed to the tip of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561 e provided on the back surface side of the tip wall member 2560.

  Referring to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560, FIG. FIG. 79 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79 (b). 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is at the release position (FIG. The state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connecting position (see FIG. 81) is illustrated in FIG. 79 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 is a cylindrical main body portion 2561a coaxially supported by the axial support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and the radial direction from the main body portion 2561a. The plate-like plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, the flow-through hole 2561c drilled with a diameter equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b, and the opposite side to the main portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b Curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centering on the main body portion 2561a from an end portion of the lock portion, and a locking pin protruding in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a at the tip end portion of the curved wall portion 2561d And a portion smaller than the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520, which is a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly comprises.

  In the plate portion 2561b, the radial length (length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is formed longer than the dimension in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 Ru. Thereby, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper side wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b abut (see FIG. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the downward flow by causing the ball to collide with the abutting wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving downward of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball having passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is disposed on the back side of the abutting wall 2561d1. By rolling on 2561 d 2, it has a role of making the subsequent flow down smoothly.

  Next, the operation of the left swinging unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swinging unit 2500. FIG. In FIGS. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, and in FIG. A state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view is illustrated, and in FIG. 82, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline at the middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution projection 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the ball which has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is a right side in a front view of the second distribution projection 2521g. And the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the discharge recess 2521 h is disposed on the front side of the side flow downstream passage 2515. Thus, the ball can flow down the lateral flow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thus, it is possible to prevent the balls from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stay in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next coming ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. This can be prevented, and the next coming ball can be fixed to the outside (upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution projection 2521g.

  The first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521 g is guided by the ball held on the outer side (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g By being disposed at a position along the right side wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left of the second distribution projection 2521g and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Ru. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521 h can be fixed to one.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position, the first passage is formed from the proximal end (left end in FIG. 80) to the distal end (right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated in a state in which the balls supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remain and the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the proximal end by the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from falling from the distal end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the ball which has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 has the second distribution convex. Get on the tip of the part 2521g and stop flowing down. Thus, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the connection position, the balls are supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522 b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. It can be prevented.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, it is inclined downward toward the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. Therefore, when the opening at the tip end is always open, the ball remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 as shown in FIG. May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (the rotation unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)) to cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the tip wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening of the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening. Can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position, the ball which has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is a left front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. , And is moved to the front through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and extending the first passage forming member 2520 Flow down along the

  In the connection position, the push-in portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 abuts on the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f of the drive-side slide member 420 (the wall surface of the accommodation recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the push-in portion 2561f) The curved wall portion 2561 d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 82) in which the first passage forming member 2520 protrudes outward. That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is generated by the change of the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be used also as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. Thereby, the product cost can be reduced.

  At this time, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to the posture where the plate portion 2561b is in the surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b at the connection position, so that the ball reaching the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is smoothed. It is possible to send the ball to the flow-down hole 2561c (without jumping as in the case where a step occurs between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

  The ball having passed through the flow-through hole 2561 c is guided to the sensor member 422 c of the drive-side slide member 420 by rolling the rolling wall 2561 d 2 of the curved wall portion 2561 d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561 d has a role to stop the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 and a role to guide the ball that has been thrown from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flowing hole 2561 c. It is shared by.

  In the connection position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is in surface position with the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. The plate portion 2561b is in a state of being inserted inside (upper side in FIG. 82) than the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the flow-through hole 2561c only after reaching the connection position (the state in which the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connection position is reached).

  Thereby, in a state where the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball is moved to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 even when the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from the connection position to the release position. Can be reliably prevented from falling. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in succession.

  With reference to FIG. 83, a case will be described where a plurality of balls are sent in series in the first passage forming member 2520. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swinging unit 2500 and the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. FIG. In FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the ball passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially viewed in cross section, and in FIG. 83 (a), the first passage is A state in which the forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated. The situation is illustrated.

  Further, in FIG. 83 (a) to FIG. 83 (c), a ball that flows downward following the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and includes the concave portion 2561f1 on the lower side of FIG. 83 (a) starting from the abutting position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support 516 than the arc C21 centered on the shaft support 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. 83 (a), the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate by the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83 (a), the ball disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is a feed ball P21, and the ball disposed on the left side is a residual ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated, whereby the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 is abutted against the abutment wall 2561d, and the downward movement of the residual sphere P22 is stopped.

  On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, it does not stop flowing down by the abutment wall 2561d, and passes through the flow-through hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520 It is possible to throw a ball.

  In this case, although the feed ball P21 may be lifted at the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)), the upper wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b face each other in the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, the feeding ball P21 can be pushed by the wall to ensure that the feeding ball P21 passes through the flow-off hole 2561c. Thereby, the diameter of the opening of the flow-through hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow-down path of the ball flowing down the flow-through hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is of the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the side of the curved wall portion 2561d when it is moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a rolling portion of the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall The feed ball P21 is allowed to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the 2561 d2 and the upper end of the curved wall 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the ball (duration of the first passage before the feed ball P21 flows down) By stopping the member 2520 at the position of FIG. 83 (c) or reducing the speed in the vicinity of FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each embodiment mentioned above, although the case where the 3rd symbol display 81 was arranged in the horizontal direction center position of the follower side slide member 430 was explained, the liquid crystal lifting and lowering unit 3400 in the 3rd embodiment is the 3rd symbol display A device 81 is disposed to the left of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevation unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, illustrating the elevation operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the follower side slide member 3430 in chronological order. In FIGS. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the descent restricting member 415 and the elevating restricting member 417 is partially enlarged.

  Further, FIG. 84 illustrates the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 immediately after contacting the driven slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is moved upward from the state illustrated in FIG. And FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive-side slide member 420 is moved downward from the state of FIG. 85 and is disposed at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. Then, the driven slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation operation surface 434b which is the lower side surface of the hook portion 434 abuts against the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restriction member 417. A state in which the 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount is illustrated, and in FIG. 88, the driven slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state illustrated in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal lifting unit 3400 includes the base member 410, the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 3430, the drive device 440, the transmission device 450, and the lower front. A plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and operating in a mode for preventing the falling of the driven slide member 3430 are provided.

  In the base member 410, the lowering regulating member 415 and the raising regulating member 417 are disposed only on the left side of the front view, and the arrangement of the right side of the front view is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left in front view from the left and right center position, and a body member 3431 elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right direction of the body member 3431 Rises in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the functional portion 432 arranged at both ends, a guide hole 433 which is a hole drilled in the vertical direction in the functional portion 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted A wedge-shaped portion 434 extended in an inclined manner, and a fall preventing portion 435 extended on the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (side approaching the other guide hole 433); Mainly to

  The main body member 3431 is provided with a locking convex portion 3431 a which is provided on the upper end thereof so as to be convex leftward in a front view. The locking convex portion 3431 a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and prevented from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface is directed to the tip in the convex direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 capable of projecting and retracting to the right in a front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward as it goes to the tip in the projecting direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an invaginated state when energized and in an overhanging state when not energized, and in the overhanging state, the end of the rod member 3481 projects to the left and right center relative to the end of the locking projection 3431a. It consists of

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is disposed close to the left in front view. Thus, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the areas divided into the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 are collected at one place (the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84) By setting it as a large area | region, the freedom degree of the magnitude | size of the movable member which can be arrange | positioned in the vacant area | region can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is disposed close to the left side in a front view, the load given to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side becomes larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to make the postures of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in a front view.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the wire housing member 423 is disposed at the lower end portion of the left side of the second passage forming member 422 in a front view. At this time, since the center of gravity G31 of the wire housing member 423 is disposed to the left from the center position of the drive side slide member 420, the weight of the wire housing member 423 and the wires housed in the wire housing member 423 causes the drive side The slide member 420 receives a load and may be inclined counterclockwise in a front view.

  As described above, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise in a front view, rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 during lifting and lowering operations can be obtained by the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack It can be limited to rattle between the state where 452 maintains the horizontal attitude (see FIG. 87) and the state where drive side slide member 420 and rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in a front view (drive side slide It is possible to prevent the member 420 and the rack 452 from being inclined clockwise in a front view from the horizontal position.

  Therefore, while the lowering regulating member 415 and the raising regulating member 417 disposed on the left side of the front view effectively suppress the inclination of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452, the elevating operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 is guided Do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not inclined to the right in the front view, it is not necessary to arrange the lowering restricting member 415 and the raising restricting member 417 outside the functional part 432 on the right in front view Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the wire housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. It is moved to the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is increased, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the convex plate 453a is abutted against and supported by the lowering regulating member 415. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from being inclined counterclockwise in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the raised position, the locking convex portion 3431 rides over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking convex portion 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481 .

  At this time, when the rod member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the engagement convex portion 3431, the engagement convex portion 3431 can get over the rod member 3481. Thus, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod 3481 of the solenoid 3480 while the solenoid 3480 is not electrically connected.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered with the driven-side slide member 3430 disposed at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is the locking projection 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. By supporting the lower slide member 3430. The lower slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive slide member 420, and the lower slide member 3430 is maintained at the raised position.

  At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is located on the left in front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is located on the left side. Also, the driven slide member 3430 can be suppressed from falling.

  That is, when the position of the center of gravity of the driven slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven slide member 3430 may be shaken clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to vibration or the like. When the driven side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise in a front view in a state where the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, there is a risk that the locking convex portion 3431 a may slip off the rod member 3481.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the center of gravity of the driven-side slide member 3430 is on the left side in front view, so the driven-side slide member 3430 is inclined clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Being suppressed.

  Therefore, the locking convex portion 3431a tends to be inclined in the direction in which the locking convex portion 3431a approaches the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact of the locking convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is suppressed from falling off.

  Therefore, the driven side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without arranging the solenoids 3480 on both sides in the left and right direction of the driven side slide member 3430. Therefore, the number of the solenoids 3480 can be reduced. The operation of the driven slide member 3430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is retracted, the driven-side slide member 3430 falls. In the process of the driven-side slide member 3430 falling, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 is caught on the lowering regulating member 415 and causes malfunction. It can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the collar-like portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restricting member 417, the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated outward (in FIG. 87 counterclockwise) Released state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the elevation restricting member 417; The bowl-shaped portion 434 is disposed to face in the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the elevation restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 3430 so that the state changes from the released state to the engaged state, so that there is no change in posture. To increase the load and posture change amount required to change the released state and the engaged state as compared with the case of engaging in the case where the released state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member, etc. be able to. This makes it easy to maintain the engaged state in which the hook-like portion 434 of the driven slide member 3430 and the elevation restricting member 417 engage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the rising restricting member 417 is rotationally operated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, there is no need to separately provide a drive device to form the engagement state of the elevation restricting member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the opposing wall 422f2 is projected from the lower end of the upper side wall 424b of the connecting member 424 at the lower inclined position. However, the drive-side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment has a curved shape. An opposing wall 4422f2 disposed opposite to the wall 422f1 is configured as a planar wall extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the arrow LXXXIXb direction view of FIG. 89 (a). 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420. FIG. In FIGS. 89A and 89C, the drive-side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connection member 4424 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 89A). 89 (a) and 89 (b) show the downward inclined state of the connection member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) shows the upward inclined state of the connection member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extending claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b to the right in a front view.

  The extending claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upper inclined state, and is bent in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and curved, and as shown in FIG. 89 (b), (B) Left and right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the middle portion.

  The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1. The facing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged in a manner not to interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it is extended to a position overlapping with the extending claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), a portion (such as a protruding portion) that is broken when the ball collides with the path of the ball is not provided. When the ball is thrown from the ball 520 to the connecting member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being broken by colliding with the ball.

  In the upper inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), since the extending claw portion 4424f and the facing wall portion 4422f2 guide the ball, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where the upper end part (radial direction outside portion of distribution convex part 521e) of the 1st channel formation member 520 of left rocking unit 500 was opened, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Absent. For example, a cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end portion of the first passage forming member 520 is open on the side to which the balls are supplied in the left and right areas of the distribution projection 521e, and the side to which the balls are supplied. The opposite side may operate in a lidd manner. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than the sphere from mixing in the left and right areas of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  Although the case where the connection member 424 contacts and rotates the first passage forming member 520 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, by reducing the number of component parts required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422, the product cost can be reduced. Further, instead of the connection member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the positional deviation between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body due to the first passage forming member 520 coming into contact with the rubber-like elastic body. be able to.

  Although the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the rack 452 of one layer has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rack for driving the drive-side slide member 420 is configured with two layers in the front and rear, and the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the front rack and the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down with the rear rack And may be configurable. In this case, the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other by making only one of the two racks abut on the driven-side slide member 430 at the top and bottom. The drive-side slide member 420 passes through the driven-side slide member 430, and can be switched to a case where it moves up and down alone.

  Although the case where the contact part 351b and the receiving part 354b were projected outside the circle which the tooth root of other gear teeth forms was explained by each above-mentioned embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, one of the abutting portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b may be configured to be recessed toward the center side than the circle formed by the tooth bases of the other gear teeth, and the other may be extended longer by that amount.

  In the above embodiments, the portion in contact with the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the shape of a gear tooth, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion may be in contact with the contact portion 351b.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes in contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by partially scraping the gear teeth of the portion configured in a tooth shape, a surface that comes in contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed.

  Although the case where the whole of the overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into surface contact has been described in the above-described embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by providing a recessed portion which is recessed toward the rotation shaft at an intermediate position of the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area to be surface-contacted may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right elevation restricting members 417 abut at the same timing as the drive-side slide member 420 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the left and right elevation regulating members 417 may be in contact with the drive-side slide member 420. In this case, it is possible to apply an asymmetrical load to the drive side slide member 420, and the drive side slide member 420 is inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive side slide member 420 is either left or right (one of the left and right). It can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the end wall member 2560 is disposed at the end of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described in the second embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which a blower that blows air from the end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end is disposed, or an embodiment in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the end of the first passage forming member 2520 Alternatively, the end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotational direction. In this case, the ball can be prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward as it goes to the tip end in the release state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the proximal end and the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be configured in a U-shape). In this case, when the ball remains in the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be held at the middle portion (the position closer to the tip end portion than the base end portion), so the communication state changes At this time, it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is thrown from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment described above, the case where the lowering regulating member 415 and the rising regulating member 417 are disposed on one side is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower limit restraining member 415 and the upper limit restricting member 417 are disposed as a pair on the left and right of the base member 410, respectively, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for biasing the lower limit restricting member 415 and A difference may be provided between the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed and the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side. At this time, compared with the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left in front view (the side on which the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is offset), the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right in front view It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load for changing the posture of the driven slide member 3430 counterclockwise in a front view counterclockwise direction (the direction in which the driven slide member 3430 is inclined due to the deviation of the gravity center) is When the driven-side slide member 3430 changes in posture clockwise as viewed from the front due to the rapid up and down movement of the driven-side slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed while suppressing.

  In the third embodiment, although the case where the driven slide member 430 is dropped after the drive slide member 420 is disposed at the lowered position has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driven slide member 430 may be dropped in a state in which the drive slide member 420 is disposed at the intermediate position. In this state, control may be performed in such a manner that the drive-side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430 (control to repeatedly switch between the raising operation and the lowering operation). In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the driven side slide member 430 to repel (for example, to repel repeatedly) by the drive side slide member 420.

  In each of the above embodiments, the split member DV in a state in which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 is one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 is It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the division member DV for applying the driving force and the adjacent division member DV is increased, the adjacent division member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Interference can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied from the one side rotation driving member and the other side rotation driving member to the division member DV (the rotation member 640).

  In the above embodiments, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 is a divided member Although the case where the period engaged with the driven part 641 of DV overlaps was explained (refer to FIG. 75), it is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging part 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 or other While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, the other is not engaged, and the engaging portion of the one side rotation driving member 637 While the other of the engaging portions 638b of the 637b or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV, one of the engaging portions 638b may be disengaged.

  In this case, it can be avoided that the engagement portion 637b of the one side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the division member DV. . That is, the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the engagement portion 638 b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, a phase shift occurs between the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 due to the dimensional tolerance, the assembly tolerance, the drive tolerance of the drive motor 631 or the like. In the rotation member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the DVs, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 simultaneously receive the engagement of the divided member DV. When a phase shift occurs in the state of being engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is compressed and the other section is pulled, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the divided members DV. By doing this, even if a phase shift occurs, it is possible to prevent the rotation member 640 from being affected by the phase shift. As a result, even with the rotating member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV, its displacement can be stabilized.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the dividing members DV are connected in an endless manner in the rotation unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The dividing members DV are connected in an endless shape (from one end to the other end It is naturally possible to connect the dividing members DV up to and including one end and the other end unconnected. In this case, for example, the divided member DV coupled in an end-like shape may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above embodiments, or may be present along the endless track. The divided member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c is taken as an example>
In the gaming machine, the gaming machine includes a driving means, a transmission member transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. The member includes a first gear, and a second gear engaged with the first gear and disposed closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first gear, The gear includes an abutting portion formed in a part of the tooth shape, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is in the abutting portion of the first gear. By being abutted, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted.

  Here, there is provided a gaming machine comprising a drive means, a transmission member for transmitting the drive force of the drive means, and a displacement member displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the drive force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted to the linear motion of the rack, and the linear motion of the rack raises and lowers the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position. There is a thing (patent document 1: For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-80941). In this case, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight when the driving force of the drive means is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Therefore, it is necessary to keep applying the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption when holding the displacement member at the raised position is increased. On the other hand, by providing a crank mechanism in part of the drive means and utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from its raised position by its own weight even if the drive force of the drive means is released. However, in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased in size by the provision of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear is provided with the contact portion formed in a part of the tooth form, and in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact of the first gear Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacing member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear being in contact with the portion, the displacing member remains even if the driving force of the drive means is released. It can be suppressed that it is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to suppress energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position. In addition, since the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to interpose a crank mechanism separately, downsizing of the transmission member can be achieved. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth shape, and in a state in which the displacing member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear has the first contact with the first gear. A game machine A2 characterized in that rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member moves upward is restricted by the abutment of the receiving portion of the two gear.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear abuts on the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the upward direction of the displacement member Is restricted, that is, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is restricted in both forward and reverse directions, so that the displacement member held at the raised position is rattling Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is permitted.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacing member is disposed at the raised position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction to lower the displacing member is permitted. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined gear of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move to the raised position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is permitted. Therefore, when the displacing member is about to be lowered from its raised position by its own weight, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed to be able to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member, and A game machine A4 characterized in that the tooth height of the first gear is lower than that of the first gear, and a predetermined tooth of the second gear can abut on the top surface of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with the predetermined teeth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. Since it is possible to make the gear teeth lower than the teeth of the first gear and to allow predetermined teeth of the second gear to abut on the top surface of the first gear, the first gear in the direction of raising the displacement member When the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of raising the displacement member through engagement of the contact portion and the predetermined teeth, As a result, a state in which a predetermined tooth of the second gear can contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear) It can be formed reliably.

  In the gaming machine A4, a contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear is made thicker than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position can be made gentle (the allowance can be increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can abut on the contact portion of the first gear.

  In addition, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member), and the tooth thickness is As it is enlarged, the strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so that the tooth top surface is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth top surface is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while the first gear can be rotated until the predetermined teeth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear. Can be

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction to lower the displacement member and a predetermined tooth of the second gear abuts on the contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear, the predetermined position of the second gear The rotation of the first gear can be easily suppressed with the direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the gear teeth as the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacing member descends can be easily restricted, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacing member can be reliably restrained from being lowered by its own weight.

In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile,
In a state where the displacing member is disposed at the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear to move the displacing member in the rising direction. A game machine A7 characterized in that rotation of a gear is regulated.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth form, and the first member is disposed in the raised position. Since the rotation of the first gear in the upward direction of the displacement member is restricted by the abutment portion of the gear being in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the receiving portion of the second gear It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave toward the rotation shaft of the second gear at the side facing the contacting portion of the first gear and the arc of the contacting portion of the first gear A game machine A8 characterized by being curved and formed into an arc having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concaved toward the rotation shaft of the second gear at the side facing the contact portion of the first gear. Since it is curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear is in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces The abutment portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after disposing the displacement member in the raised position can be reliably exerted on the receiving portion of the second gear.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion Can be enhanced. Thus, damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when receiving the contact portion of the first gear can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and A game machine A9 characterized in that the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the upward direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear And the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction, so that the displacement member is disposed at the upward position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is lifted. Later, while stopping the second gear, it is possible to rotate only the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member ascends. Thereby, a state in which a predetermined tooth of the second gear can abut on a contact portion of the first gear (a state in which a contact portion (tooth top surface) of the first gear faces a predetermined tooth of the second gear) Can be formed reliably.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the structure connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422>
A ball includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed to allow passage of balls, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which the ball can be fed from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first and second passage members are separated. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the first and second passage members can not be communicated with each other, the first passage member or the second passage member is disposed displaceably at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A game machine B1 comprising: a connecting member which causes one end of the first passage member and the second passage member to communicate with each other in a state where the other of the two passage members abuts and is displaced.

  Here, it is provided with a first passage member and a second passage member formed so as to allow passage of a ball, and by displacement of at least the first passage member, one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other In the communication state in which the ball can be fed from the first passage member to the second passage member, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state to be communicated (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, variations in the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member are inevitable due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the parts. Therefore, in the communication state, positional deviation occurs in the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, which makes it difficult to stably feed the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first passage member or the second passage member is disposed at one end, and is in contact with and displaced from the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. In the above, since the connecting member is provided to connect the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member with each other, even if the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are misaligned, one end thereof The displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two can absorb misalignment. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member. Further, since the first passage member abuts on the connecting member to displace the connecting member with the displacement of the first passage member, the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force for driving.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and the other side wall portion disposed opposite to each other across the opening of one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion When the first passage member is displaced on the displacement trajectory of the first passage member, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is in contact with one side wall portion of the connection member A game machine B2 characterized in that the connecting member is displaced, and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is in contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member The connection member is displaced, and the other side wall portion of the connection member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, so that one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connection member The first passage member and one end of the second passage member can be brought closer to each other, and misalignment between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member such that one end thereof is the rotating tip end, and the connection member is a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. The connection member is rotated when the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is abutted against one side wall portion of the connection member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the other side wall portion of the connection member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first passage member is rotated with its one end serving as the rotating tip end to form a communication state, and the connecting member is the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member can be smoothly performed along with the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member. Moreover, the other side wall part of a connection member can be more closely approached to the other end of a 1st channel | path member or a 2nd channel | path member by utilizing both rotational operation.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, in the communication state, one of the opposing surfaces of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall and the other side wall has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is a rolling surface at the time of being thrown, and in the communication state, the one facing surface is lowered from the first passage member to the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding of the balls in the communicating portion between the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, the ball feeding of the ball becomes unstable, and the rolling surface of the ball in the communicating portion is formed. One of the opposing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member to the second passage member, so that the ball can be rolled to stabilize its ball feeding.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member, and in the released state, in the first passage member A game machine B5 characterized in that it comprises a ball throwing restricting means for restricting the ball from being thrown from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not in communication. When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball passing through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, even in the communication state, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member, the ball remains in the first passage member for some reason, and when the state is shifted to the release state as it is, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that has stayed at may fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, the movement of the movable member such as the gear or the crank mechanism may be impeded, or the ball may be pinched to cause breakage of the movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member In addition, in the released state, the ball in the first passage member is provided with the ball throwing restricting means for restricting the ball being thrown from one end of the first passage member, so for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state Even when the ball stays in the first passage member and the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  The gaming machine B5 includes a cover body which is disposed at one end of the first passage member and allows passage of the ball in the communication state and restricts the passage of the ball in the release state, and the cover body is the throwing restriction. A game machine B6 characterized in forming a means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the cover as the throwing control means for permitting passage of the ball in the communication state and restricting the passage of the ball in the release state at one end of the first passage member Because the body is disposed, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball moves from the communication state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the first passage It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting the passage of the balls, and acts on the cover body with displacement of the first passage member. An action member for displacing the cover body in a direction allowing passage of the ball when the communication state is formed at least; game machine B7;

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, since the biasing member is provided to apply a biasing force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position to restrict passage of the ball, Careless displacement of the body can be suppressed, and as a result, the balls can be more reliably suppressed from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in the direction to allow passage of the ball, so that the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction to allow passage of the ball is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the drive means for displacing the first passage member displaces the cover body. It can also be made to serve as a drive means for making it possible to reduce the product cost accordingly.

  The action member is located on the displacement locus of the cover body along with the displacement of the first passage member, and is in contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement locus to resist the urging force of the urging member. And driving the driving means for displacing the first passage member (for example, the second passage member, the connection member, the member fixed to the game board, etc.) or displacing the first passage member. Are transmitted to the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear, a rack and pinion, etc. which convert the driving means and the driving force into rotational motion or linear motion and transmit it to the cover Is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing control means arranges the first passage member such that one end of the first passage member is uppermost in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the throwing control means arranges the first passage member in the released state in which the one end of the first passage member is uppermost. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball is shifted from the communication state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball goes out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress falling.

  Note that the first passage member disposed in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is in the uppermost position in the released state does not have to be inclined upward as a whole of the first passage member, and the first passage member There may be a horizontal or downward slope region in part.

  In the gaming machine B5, the ball throwing restricting means is characterized in that the first passage member is disposed in the posture of rising and tilting from the other end of the first passage member to the one end in the released state. Game machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the throwing control means is disposed in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the release state. Therefore, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball moves from the communication state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball from one end of the first passage member Can be easily suppressed from falling outside the game area.

  Further, in the case of forming the communication state, it is possible to form a state in which the whole of the first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to the one end, so it is easy to send balls from the first passage member to the second passage member. , You can control that the ball stays on the way. Therefore, when it transfers to a cancellation | release state, it can suppress that the ball which remained in the 1st passage member falls to a game area.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed to allow passage of a ball, one side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, And a distribution member which is displaced between the other side positions for distributing the ball, which flows down from the upstream passage, to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed such that both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member are opened. Game machine B10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed open on both sides in the displacement direction of the sorting member, so one side position or the other side position Even when the ball flows down between the distributing member and the case body displaced toward the direction, it is possible to suppress that the flowed down ball is sandwiched between the distributing member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distributing member is formed in the first passage member, and the distributing member is disposed at the one side position when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member. A game machine B11, wherein the distributing member is disposed at the other side position when the released state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B10, the distributing member is formed on the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at the one side position and the other side position with the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the drive means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the drive means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distributing member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when a displacement occurs between the distributing member and the first passage member due to occurrence of control failure, the released state The ball may be distributed to the first passage member located at the side (i.e., the distributing member is disposed at one side position), and the ball may fall from the one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distributing member is formed on the first passage member, the displacement state of the distributing member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it can be avoided that the ball is distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, the distributing member is always on the other side when the released state is formed) As a result, it is possible to reliably suppress the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and a wall portion of the first passage member is used as the distributing member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes the wall portion that divides the passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is the distribution member. The parts cost can be reduced by sharing parts. In addition, by using the wall portion that defines the passage through which the ball passes as the distribution member, the distributed ball can be reliably made to flow down to the passage.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for restricting the rebound of the driven side slide member 430 is taken as an example>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported in the lowered position The displacing member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member as the raising and lowering member is raised, the supporting member and a raising and lowering member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member. In the gaming machine, the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, and the displacement member is moved upward as the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position. A game machine C1 comprising a rise restricting member for restricting displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the raised position and the lowered position, and the displacement member supported at the lowered position And a lifting member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is lifted from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the lifting member as the lift member rises. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from its raised position to its lowered position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is placed on the support member and supported by the support member to be maintained at the lowered position. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the upward direction along the guide member, rattle is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position Was unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the elevation restricting member is provided which restricts the displacement of the displacing member in the upward direction when the displacing member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member follows the guide member at the lowered position. It is possible to regulate displacement in the upward direction, and to suppress rattling caused by disturbance. As a result, the attitude of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  The gaming machine C1 includes biasing means for biasing the rise restricting member in a direction toward the displacement member, and the displacement member abuts on the rise restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A lift acting member for displacing the lift restricting member in the direction of moving away from the displacement member; and allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member at the lowered position; A game machine C2 comprising: an engaging portion to be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the displacing member moves away from the displacing member in a direction away from the displacing member when the displacing member is lowered by its own weight; In this case, since the engaging portion that engages with the elevation restricting member is provided, the restricting state by the elevation restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacing member to the lowered position by its own weight. There is no need to provide a separate drive source for Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the elevation restricting member to be displaced in the direction approaching the displacement member, the portion corresponding to the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion It is possible to increase the force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the elevation restricting member. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion can be easily maintained.

  In the game machine C2, the release of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member is released by raising the elevating member. Even in the case where it is intended that the user input the input and return, it is possible to suppress the inadvertent release of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member.

  In addition, since the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevation member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement. The drive source for moving the member up and down can also be used as a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. .

  Furthermore, when separately providing a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, the engaging portion of the elevation restraining member and the displacing member In the state where the engagement of the lifting member is not released, there is a possibility that the lifting member may ascend and push up the displacement member. According to the gaming machine C3, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released Since it can be performed according to the operation of pushing up the displacement member by the raising and lowering member as the raising and lowering member rises, when pushing up the displacement member by the raising and lowering member, the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member Can be reliably released.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the lifting member is lifted, the lifting member abuts against the lifting regulating member to displace the lifting regulating member, and the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member A game machine C4 characterized by comprising a release operation unit for releasing the engagement.

  Here, although release of the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevation member moves up and down, in this case, the pushing force It is necessary to set it in the engagement state which can be released by this, and firm engagement becomes difficult. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, a vibration is generated by reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member abuts on the elevating regulating member by displacing the elevating regulating member when the elevating member is elevated. Since the release action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is provided, even when the rise restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is reliably performed. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member caused by the disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacement member by suppressing the vibration due to the reaction when the engagement is released.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the elevation restricting member causes the elevating member to raise and lower the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement with the engagement portion of the displacement member is released. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the rise restricting member is displaced between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement with the engaging portion of the displacement member is released. Since it is in contact with the elevating member to be moved up and down, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacing member that is lifted and lowered along with the lifting and lowering member.

  In the gaming machine C5, the elevation restricting member brought into contact with the elevating member is biased by the biasing means in a direction approaching the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the lift regulating member in contact with the elevating member is biased by the biasing means in the direction approaching the elevating member. It can be biased to stabilize its posture. Further, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the elevating member by the elastic buffer action of the biasing means.

  The gaming machine C6 comprises a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack in which the pinion is engaged, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the elevating member is A game machine C7 characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction of being separated from the pinion via a rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the rotational movement of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into linear movement of the rack, and the linear movement causes the elevating member to move up and down along the guide member. Ru. In this case, the elevating member is biased in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the elevation restricting member, so that the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the lifting member rattles in the direction in which the gap between the rack and pinion teeth narrows, the biasing force of the biasing means acts in the direction to widen the gap, while the gap between the rack and pinion teeth widens In the case where the lifting member rattles, the guide structure of the guide member can regulate that the interval is expanded beyond a certain level. Accordingly, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, and it is possible to suppress an excessive meshing resistance.

  A gaming machine C8 according to any one of game machines C1 to C7, comprising: a descent regulating member for regulating displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction when the elevating member pushes the displacing member to the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, since any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes the descent regulating member that regulates the displacement in the descent direction of the elevating member when the elevating member pushes the displacing member up to the elevating position. The displacing member and the raising and lowering member provided can be supported by the lowering control member. As a result, since the driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be eliminated, the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the restraining member is regulated by elevating the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for forming the restraining by the restraining member, and the driving source for elevating the elevating member Can also be used as a driving source for forming the restriction by the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the restriction by the lowering restriction member is released by lowering the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the release by the lowering regulating member is released by lowering the lifting member, so it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the regulation. The drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering regulating member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  When a drive source for releasing the restriction by the lowering restriction member is separately provided, for example, the raising and lowering member is lowered and driven in a state where the restriction by the lowering restriction member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Since there is a possibility that overload may act on the source or damage to the lowering restriction member etc., according to the gaming machine C9, the restriction by the lowering restriction member can be canceled in accordance with the lowering operation of the raising and lowering member. When the elevating member is lowered, it is possible to form a state in which the restriction by the lowering restricting member is reliably released.

  In the case where the lowering regulating member is a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacing member in the lowering direction, not the lifting member, the structure by which the regulation by the lowering regulating member is released along with the lowering of the lifting member is complicated. According to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent regulating member is configured to regulate the displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction, the release of the regulation by the descent regulating member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be carried out can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state in which the downward movement of the elevation member is restricted by the downward movement restriction member, the upward movement restriction member is in contact with the upward and downward movement member, and the downward movement restriction member is in contact with the upward and downward movement member. A game machine C10, wherein the direction of contact is different from the direction of contact of the elevation restricting member with the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering regulating member is in contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the rising regulating member is in contact with the elevating member. The restraining member and the elevation restricting member can respectively suppress rattling of the elevating member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the raising and lowering member can be effectively stabilized.

  The gaming machine C10 includes a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack in which the pinion is engaged, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the lowering restriction member is A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the gaming machine C11 is in contact with the elevating member in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational movement of the pinion rotationally driven by the drive means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear movement. In this case, the rack (lifting member) can be displaced in the direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, while the lowering regulating member is abutted on the raising and lowering member from the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack Thus, the rack (lifting member) can be restricted from being displaced relative to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the rise restricting member and the support member can be in contact with the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. A game machine C12 characterized in that each of the game machines is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in the state where the displacing member is disposed at the lowered position, the one side and the other side of the rising restricting member and the supporting member sandwiching the guiding member. Since each of the guide members is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacing member, rattling in either direction of one side or the other side of the displacing member relative to the guide member is restricted by the abutment of the elevation restricting member or the supporting member. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the displacing member disposed at the lowered position due to the disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, when the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation restricting member abut on the displacement member while the positions thereof are different along the extending direction of the guide member. A game machine C13, which is disposed as much as possible, and the support member is disposed above the rise restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation restricting member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. Since the displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacement member, rattling of the displacement member in the oblique direction can be regulated by the abutment with the elevation regulating member and the support member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the displacing member disposed at the lowered position due to the disturbance.

  Further, since the support member is disposed above the elevation restricting member, the support member does not inhibit the elevation of the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the freedom of design can be secured.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for detecting the detection target portion 641 of the rotating member 640 by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movably formed and detection means for detecting the movement position of the movable member, the detection means arranges the movable member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement thereof. A game machine D1 comprising: a plurality of detection target units provided; and a plurality of detection sensors provided on a movement trajectory of the detection target units.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a movable member that is rotatably formed and a detection unit that detects the rotational position of the movable member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit disposed opposite to each other with the slits interposed, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse signal is accumulated and added, and based on the accumulated number of pulses, the amount of rotation (that is, the rotational position) of the movable member from the reference position is detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving unit, a shift occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member can not be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection results are affected, and the effects on the detection results are accumulated each time a detection failure occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means is disposed on the moving track of the plurality of detected portions disposed on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of the movement, and the moving locus of the detected portions. Since the plurality of detection sensors provided are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on only the current detection results detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the detection result of the detection sensor needs to be detected for the movement position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detection target is one of the plurality of divided members. And a plurality of detection sensors are disposed at intervals based on the disposition intervals of the division members. The gaming machine D2 to be.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, as well as including the plurality of divided members, Is disposed on a part of the plurality of divided members and not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the disposition interval of the divided members Therefore, the combination of detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different each time the moving member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the dividing members. That is, the movement position of the moving member can be detected with the movement amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the division members as the minimum unit.

  Note that when a plurality of detection sensors are disposed at intervals based on the disposition interval of the division members, the plurality of detection sensors are disposed at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of division members. It means that. That is, this means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where detection of the presence or absence of the detection target of the corresponding divided member is possible.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are narrower than the first interval. And a plurality of second sections connected to each other at intervals of, the plurality of detection sensors are moving trajectories of the detection target in the first section at intervals based on the disposition intervals of the division members in the first section. A game machine D3 characterized in that the game machine is disposed on top.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, in the moving member, the first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval and the plurality of divided members are more than the first interval Since the second section connected at the second interval which is the narrow interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened compared to the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for the disposition of the moving member can be reduced.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the movement trajectory of the detection target in the first section at intervals based on the disposition interval (first interval) of the division members in the first section. It is easy to secure the space required for the arrangement of the detection sensor. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (the second interval) of the division members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor, and hence the second interval It can be set to a narrow interval. As a result, it is possible to reduce the space required for the disposition of the moving member also from this point.

  In the gaming machine D3, the dividing member includes a main body member on which the detection target member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are movably connected to each of the main body member and the main body of the adjacent dividing member. The distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced in the first section. A game machine D4 that reaches the end and is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, both ends of the dividing member can be displaced between the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body of the main body member and the adjacent dividing member. The link member is connected to the link member, and the distance between the dividing member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. And the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the displacement end, and the displacement of the dividing member in the direction to widen the distance between the adjacent dividing members is restricted. It is possible to suppress the variation in position of the part. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the dividing member is disposed displaceably, and the base member guides a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member and the link member when the dividing member is displaced. And the link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, and the main body member and the adjacent portion are adjacent to each other. A game machine D5 characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the dividing member is displaced and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. The guiding portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guiding portion of the base member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member, The interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased according to the change in the attitude of the link member. That is, while moving the moving member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased to form the first section and the second section.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guided portion of the base member is slidably inserted through the guided portion of the link member. The gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is guided by the link member The portion is formed into a groove shape which is slidably inserted, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, so that the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. As a result, it is possible to reliably restrict displacement of the divided members in the direction of widening the distance between the adjacent divided members, and to suppress positional variation of the detection target in the direction of widening the gap. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, and in the first section, the dividing member abuts on the main body member of the adjacent dividing member. A game machine D7 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the displacement of the division member in a direction to narrow an interval between the adjacent division members is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, and in the first section, the dividing members are adjacent to each other. The displacement member is displaced to a position abutted against the main body member, and the displacement of the division member in the direction of narrowing the distance between the adjacent division members is restricted, so the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the distance Position variation can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for adjusting the distance between the divided members DV in the moving member 640 is an example>
In the gaming machine provided with a movable member formed movably, the movable member is provided with a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the movement direction, and the movable member And a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval smaller than the first interval. A game machine E1 characterized in that a section is formed.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed rotatably (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information may be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front of the moving member, and the player may be made to visually recognize the identification information disposed at the predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to secure a certain size or more. Therefore, when the number of display of identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member is increased, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, reducing the diameter of the moving member reduces the number of display of identification information.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, in the moving member, the first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval, and the plurality of divided members are spaced smaller than the first interval. Since the second section connected with the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened compared to the case where the whole is connected with the first interval. As a result, the space required for the disposition of the moving member can be reduced. That is, while securing the number of divided members, it is possible to suppress the space required for arranging the plurality of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying identification information on each division member, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a movement member can be suppressed, ensuring the display number of identification information.

  In the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are movably connected to each of the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member, and the link member is the main body member and A game machine E2 characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes the main body member, and the link member whose both ends are movably connected to each of the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member. The distance between the dividing member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body of the main member and the adjacent divided member, thereby forming the first section and the second section. Structure can be simplified.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the dividing member is disposed displaceably, and the base member guides a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member and the link member when the dividing member is displaced. And the link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, and the main body member and the adjacent portion are adjacent to each other. A game machine E3 characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the dividing member is displaced and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. The guiding portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guiding portion of the base member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the adjacent main body of the dividing member, The interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased according to the change in the attitude of the link member. That is, while moving the moving member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased to form the first section and the second section.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the division member includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the main body member, and the displacement member is inclined toward the adjacent division member in the first section. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section is in a more upright position than the attitude in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is inclined toward the adjacent divided member in the first section, so the displacement member can be viewed from the player It can be made easy. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be enhanced. Further, in the first section, the distance between the division members is increased, so that a space for tilting the displacement member can be secured, and the displacement member can be increased in size. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is set to a posture standing up more than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body members of the adjacent divided members. To make them closer together. That is, the second interval in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the moving member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. A gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member Since it arrange | positions, interference with a displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to contact with each other, and the distance between them can be narrowed. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the moving member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E3, a gaming machine E6 characterized in that a track of the base guiding portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, since the track of the main body guiding portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, the structure for displacing the main body member by being guided by the main body guiding portion of the base member Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the track of the division members in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all the plurality of division members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A game machine E7 characterized by being equivalent to the radius in the case of arranging in a circle.

  Here, a first section in which the plurality of divided members are circumferentially connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are at a second interval smaller than the first interval are circumferentially connected. In the case where the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as "the former case"), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as "the latter"). Since the length in the circumferential direction can be shortened, it is possible to reduce the space necessary for arranging the plurality of divided members while securing the number of divided members. However, when the trajectories of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circle, the radius in the former case is smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members in the first section in the former case, the total number of divided members forming the moving member is the actual number based on the number and the radius of the divided members in the first section. Recall the fewer numbers.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the track of the division members in the first section is formed into an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is a plurality of divided members The radius is equal to the radius in the case of connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval and arranging them in a circle, thus securing the number of the plurality of divided members and suppressing the space necessary for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members However, the player can recall a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which a guiding portion is extended and a plurality of divided members displaced along the guiding portion of the base member, and applying a driving force to the moving member The base member includes a driving means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided members to thereby set a first guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members to a first distance, and more than the first distance. And a second guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members at a narrow second distance, and the drive means includes a rotational drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the divided members, and the rotational drive thereof A game machine F1 characterized in that the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portions of the base member by rotating the members while engaging the engaging portions with the divided members.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed rotatably (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of pieces of identification information may be displayed along the circumferential direction on the front of the moving member, and the player may be made to visually recognize the identification information disposed at the predetermined position. However, in consideration of the player's visibility, the identification information needs to secure a certain size or more. Therefore, when the number of display of identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member is increased, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, reducing the diameter of the moving member reduces the number of display of identification information.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first distance to the moving member and a section narrower than the first distance. By forming a section to which a plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval, the number of divided members can be secured while securing the number of divided members as compared with the case where the whole is connected at a first interval. The space required for arranging the dividing members can be suppressed. That is, when the identification information is displayed on each dividing member, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I thought about it.

  However, the moving member in which the plurality of dividing members are connected, the section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at the first interval, and the plurality of dividing members are connected at the second interval smaller than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member relative to the base member while forming the section to be

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing members to make the first guiding portion setting the distance between the dividing members to the first distance, and the first guiding portion narrower than the first distance. The drive means includes a rotation drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the division member, and the rotation drive member is engaged with the rotation guide member. Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by being rotated while engaging the parts with the divided members, a section with a wide interval and a narrow section (the first interval Such a moving member can be displaced relative to the base member while forming a section and a second interval section) on the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, a plurality of the engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member, so that the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member can be improved. Can.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided body members in the circumferential direction, and the driving means includes two of the rotational driving members, and those two are rotated A game machine F3 characterized in that drive members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, since the two rotation driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, the rotation driving member is applied to the moving member The driving force can be distributed to different circumferential positions of the moving member. Thereby, it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the moving member by suppressing the application of the driving force from being biased to a part of the plurality of divided members.

  In the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are made circular, and the two rotation driving members make the phase different by 180 degrees in the circular orbit. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine is disposed at a fixed position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are made circular, and the two rotation driving members are circular orbits. , And the driving force from the rotation drive member can be applied to the two most separated portions of the moving member (a plurality of divided members). The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member, the rotation drive member 2 is the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member The game machine F5 is arranged such that the phases of the engagement portions are different from each other so that the plurality of division members are engaged with the division members.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member, the other two rotation drive members The engagement portions of the rotation drive member are arranged so that the phases of the engagement portions are different from each other so that the engagement portions of the rotation drive member are engaged with the divided members. It can be avoided that the engaging portion and the engaging member are not simultaneously engaged with the dividing member, and intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member can be suppressed. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of divided members are endlessly connected as in the present invention, when the transmission of the driving force from the rotation driving member to the moving member becomes intermittent, the division is carried out along with the transmission and release of the driving force. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the attitude of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, any one of the engagement portion of one rotation drive member and the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the divided member, and the driving force is always exerted on the moving member Can form a transmitted state, which makes it easy to keep the distance between the divided members constant. As a result, even if it is a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner, its posture can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include engaged portions in which the engaging portions of the rotation driving means are engaged, and the engaged portions are tracks of the plurality of divided members. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is disposed on the outer peripheral side in.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members are provided with engaged portions into which the engaging portions of the rotation driving means are engaged, and the engaged portions Since the part is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the tracks of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (plurality of divided members) relative to the amount of rotation of the rotation drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotation drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotational driving member is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided along the first guiding portion of the guiding portions. Game machine F7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotary drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, divided members Since the engaging portion can be engaged at the position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the distance is wide, the interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotary drive member can be suppressed, and the rotary drive member The diameter of the can be increased. As a result, the driving torque applied from the rotation driving member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any one of the game machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing members displaced along the guiding portion to set the distance between the dividing members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion for transitioning from the second distance to the first distance or the second distance, and the rotary drive member is connected to the divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F8 characterized in that the engaging portion is disposed at an engageable position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation driving member is a divided member guided along the third guiding portion of the guiding portions, that is, adjacent divisions The guide portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose distance from the member is transitioned from the first distance or the second distance to the second distance or the first distance. The division member receiving a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation drive member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized by suppressing bending of the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members in the middle.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the dividing member may be a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and a main body member of the dividing member having one end rotatably connected to the main body member and adjacent thereto. And a link member slidably connected at one end, wherein the one end and the other end of the link member are respectively rotated and slid with respect to the body member and the body member of the adjacent division member, whereby the division member and The distance between adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotational drive member is a main body member of the divided members, from the site where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided members is slidably connected A game machine F9 characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion connected rotatably.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guiding portion and one end rotatably connected to the main body member A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the body member of the adjacent divided member, one end and the other end of the link member being respectively rotated and slid relative to the body member of the body member and the adjacent divided member Thus, the distance between the dividing member and the adjacent dividing member is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotation driving member is a main body member of the dividing member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent dividing member is slidably coupled. The main body member of the dividing member is driven by the rotational drive member and displaced along the guide portion because the one end of the link member is engaged with a position closer to the rotatably connected portion than the portion where the When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the game machine F4 or F5, a game machine F10 having a drive gear which is disposed concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members and which is meshed with the two rotation drive members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the drive gears respectively meshed with the two rotational driving members are provided, the two rotational driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gear. Can be rotated in the closed state. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circle which is the track of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member of 2 are movable members (a plurality of divided members) in the front view of the base member. It can be disposed inward from the outer periphery of the movement trajectory of That is, since the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are not projected outward beyond the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine K2 characterized in that any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine Feature game machine K3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine is known in which the displacement member is lifted by being pushed up by the lift member as the lift member rises, and the displacement member is lowered by its own weight as the lift member descends. There is. (Patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-233494).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the attitude of the displacement member at the lowered position is unstable.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the attitude of the displacement member at the lowered position.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 can be displaced along the guide member between a vertically extending guide member and a guide member guided by the guide member. A displacing member, a supporting member for supporting the displacing member at the lowered position, and an elevating member formed to be movable up and down along the guide member, and the elevating member is moved along with the elevating member The displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up, and the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the elevation member is lowered, the displacement member Is lowered to the lowered position to restrict the upward displacement of the displacement member.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, further comprising biasing means for biasing the rise restricting member in a direction approaching the displacement member, the displacement member being a displacement member thereof A separation action portion which abuts on the elevation regulating member and displaces the elevation regulating member in a direction of separating from the displacement member when being lowered by its own weight, and the elevation regulation member approaches the displacement member at the lowered position And an engagement portion for permitting displacement in the direction of movement and engaging with the elevation restricting member.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the engagement between the elevation restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member. It will be.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the product cost can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it can be suppressed that the engagement is released carelessly.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
100-104 substrate box 330 elevating body (displacement member)
341 Drive motor (drive means)
351 1st gear (1st gear, part of transmission member)
351b Contact portion 352 Second gear (second gear, part of transmission member)
354b Receiving part 354c adjacent gear teeth (predetermined teeth)
413 Locking part (supporting means )
415 descent regulating member 417 ascent regulating member (climbing regulating means)
417c Release convex part (release action part)
417 g Torsion spring (biasing means)
420 Drive side slide member (part of lifting means )
422 Second passage forming member (second passage member, acting member)
422b Shaft support (rotational shaft)
422f accommodation recess (part of action member)
424 Connecting member 424 a Tubular part (rotational shaft)
424b upper side wall (one side wall)
424c lower side wall (other side wall)
430, 3430 Drive side slide member (displacement means )
434a Engaging surface (engaging portion)
434b Separation action surface (separation action part)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
442 Drive gear (pinion)
451 Guide bar (guide means )
452 rack (part of lifting means )
453 Abutment wall (part of lifting means )
510, 2510 Base member (part of case body)
512 shaft support hole (rotation shaft)
515, 2515 Downflow passage (downstream passage)
520, 2520 first passage forming member (first passage member)
521, 2521 distribution base member (distribution member)
521c support (rotational shaft)
521e Distribution projection (wall)
550 Cover member (part of case body)
552 Introduction cylindrical part (upstream passage)
2560 Tip wall member (ball throwing control means, cover body)
2562 Torsion spring (biasing member)
620 Guide member (base member, body guide portion)
621 Connection link action groove (link guide part, guide part)
621a Large diameter part (1st guide part)
621b Small diameter part (second guide part)
621c connection part (third guide part)
630 Drive mechanism (drive means)
634 Central transmission member (drive gear)
637 One side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
637b engagement portion 638 other side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
638b engaging portion 640 rotating member (moving member)
DV divided member 641 engaged part 641c detected part (detection means)
642 Rear side body (body member)
643 Front body (body member)

Claims (2)

A draft in the unit, a displacement means which is capable displacement of between guided first position and the second position in the vertical direction on the guide means, support means for supporting the displacement means to the second position, the upper and lower and a lifting means which is formed to be descending temperature in a direction, the displacement means in the accompanying be raised has its lifting means increase of the lifting means is raised to a first position from the second position, the lifting means Game machine in which the displacement means is lowered from the first position to the second position by its own weight as the
Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises the elevation regulating means the displacement means for regulating the displacement in the upward direction of the displacement means and is lowered to the second position. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a substrate box .

Images